WO2022266803A1 - Mechanical matrix, and control method and apparatus for mechanical matrix - Google Patents

Mechanical matrix, and control method and apparatus for mechanical matrix Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2022266803A1
WO2022266803A1 PCT/CN2021/101254 CN2021101254W WO2022266803A1 WO 2022266803 A1 WO2022266803 A1 WO 2022266803A1 CN 2021101254 W CN2021101254 W CN 2021101254W WO 2022266803 A1 WO2022266803 A1 WO 2022266803A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
motion unit
contact
target
motion
height
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2021/101254
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
王培至
郑明辉
王谊
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Priority to CN202180005753.XA priority Critical patent/CN116171569A/en
Priority to PCT/CN2021/101254 priority patent/WO2022266803A1/en
Publication of WO2022266803A1 publication Critical patent/WO2022266803A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B60VEHICLES IN GENERAL
    • B60RVEHICLES, VEHICLE FITTINGS, OR VEHICLE PARTS, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • B60R11/00Arrangements for holding or mounting articles, not otherwise provided for
    • B60R11/02Arrangements for holding or mounting articles, not otherwise provided for for radio sets, television sets, telephones, or the like; Arrangement of controls thereof
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F3/00Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
    • G06F3/01Input arrangements or combined input and output arrangements for interaction between user and computer
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04MTELEPHONIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04M1/00Substation equipment, e.g. for use by subscribers
    • H04M1/02Constructional features of telephone sets
    • H04M1/04Supports for telephone transmitters or receivers

Definitions

  • the present application relates to the field of mechanical structures, in particular to a mechanical matrix and a control method and device for the mechanical matrix.
  • the mechanical matrix includes multiple matrix units, and each matrix unit can move bidirectionally along a straight line, that is, the height of each matrix unit is adjustable.
  • the plurality of matrix units can be arranged in order in rows and columns.
  • the number of matrix units can be customized according to the actual application environment.
  • various static and dynamic patterns can be constructed to simulate three-dimensional topography, urban planning changes, movable type printing, text patterns, wave movements, etc.
  • the device can also be combined with digital images to form various realistic three-dimensional dynamic patterns.
  • the three-dimensional shape formed by the mechanical matrix is preset, and the flexibility of the adjustment method is low.
  • the present application provides a mechanical matrix, a control method and a device for the mechanical matrix, which can improve the flexibility of the adjustment mode of the mechanical matrix.
  • a mechanical matrix including a plurality of motion units; the height of the top of each motion unit is adjustable; each motion unit is provided with a sensor, and the sensor is used to output contact information, and the contact information It is used to indicate whether the tip of the set motion unit is in contact with the target.
  • the contact information output by the sensor is used to indicate whether the motion unit is in contact with the target. Therefore, the mechanical matrix can be provided with the ability of human-computer interaction, and the mechanical matrix can be controlled according to the contact information output by the sensor, and the control flexibility of the mechanical matrix can be improved.
  • the plurality of motion units include a first motion unit and a second motion unit, and in the mechanical array adjusted according to the contact information, the first motion unit
  • the unit and the second movement unit form a concave structure, the height of the top of the first movement unit is smaller than the height of the top of the second movement unit, the second movement unit surrounds the first movement unit, the The first motion unit includes a contact motion unit that is in contact with the target among the plurality of motion units.
  • the height of the top of the moving unit is adjusted, so that a concave structure is formed in the mechanical array adjusted according to the contact information, and the target is located in the concave.
  • the flexible form of the shelf can reduce the space occupied by the shelf.
  • the first motion unit is the contact motion unit
  • the second motion unit is one of the plurality of motion units that is less than a preset distance from the contact motion unit Neighboring motion units of the value.
  • the first motion units located at the bottom of the concave structure are all in contact with the target, so that the bottom of the concave structure adapts to the shape of the target, provide stable support for the target, and improve the support stability for placed objects.
  • the second motion unit surrounding the bottom of the concave structure is not in contact with the target, and the distance between the second motion unit and the first motion unit at the bottom of the concave structure is less than or equal to a preset value, so that the shape and size of the concave structure are adapted to
  • the shape of the target improves the support stability of the mechanical matrix for placed items and prevents the target from shaking.
  • the mechanical matrix is located in a vehicle, and the vehicle is in a bumpy state, the direction of change of the height of the contact motion unit is opposite to the vibration direction of the vehicle vibration, and the contact motion unit
  • the height variation of a unit is positively correlated with the vibration distance of the vehicle vibration, and the contact motion unit is a motion unit in contact with the target among the plurality of motion units.
  • the target is an electronic display device, and in the mechanical array adjusted according to the contact information, the contacts among the multiple motion units that are in contact with the target
  • the motion unit forms a frame for setting the orientation of the target.
  • the absolute height of the vehicle changes.
  • the height of the contact motion unit is adjusted so that the top of the contact motion unit moves relative to the vehicle.
  • the tip of the contact motion unit moves in a direction opposite to the vibration direction of the vehicle, and the height change difference of the contact motion unit is positively correlated with the vibration distance of the vehicle.
  • the change range of the absolute distance of the target is reduced, and the bumps suffered by the target are reduced.
  • the target is an electronic display device, and in the mechanical array adjusted according to the contact information, the contacts among the multiple motion units that are in contact with the target
  • the motion unit forms a frame for setting the orientation of the target.
  • the goal is electronic display equipment, control the mechanical matrix to form a bracket, adjust the orientation of electronic display equipment, and improve user experience.
  • the bracket makes the target face the user's head.
  • the bracket formed on the top of each motion unit in the mechanical matrix makes the electronic wire device face the user's head, which can improve the user experience.
  • At least one slope surface is formed on the top of the motion unit, so that the target slides to a target position, and the target position is located at the symmetry plane of the user's head , the bracket is located at the target position.
  • Setting the electronic display device on the symmetrical plane of the head can make the distance between the user's eyes and the electronic display device equal, thereby improving user experience.
  • the target slides on the slope so that the bottom of the target is perpendicular to the direct viewing direction of the user, and the support is formed such that the bottom A side is perpendicular to the plane of symmetry and directs the target towards the user's head.
  • the mechanical array is used to display an image
  • the multiple motion units correspond to multiple pixels of the image
  • the color of at least one pixel is changed
  • the at least one pixel is a pixel corresponding to at least one of the contact motion unit and the adjacent motion unit
  • the contact motion unit is the pixel corresponding to the plurality of motion units.
  • a moving unit that is in contact with the target, and the adjacent moving unit is a moving unit whose distance from the contacting moving unit is smaller than a preset value.
  • the color of each pixel can also be adjusted according to the contact information output by the support structure, making the control of the mechanical matrix more flexible.
  • a method for controlling a mechanical matrix includes a plurality of motion units, each of which is provided with a sensor, and the method includes: acquiring Contact information output by the set sensor, the contact information is used to indicate whether the top of the motion unit is in contact with the target; according to the contact information, adjust the height of the top of at least one of the motion units, the at least one motion unit includes a contact A motion unit and/or an adjacent motion unit, the tip of the contact motion unit is in contact with the target, and the distance between the adjacent motion unit and the contact motion unit is less than a preset value.
  • the contact information output by the sensor is used to indicate whether the tip of the motion unit is in contact with the target, and if there is a contact motion unit with the tip in contact with the target in the mechanical matrix, adjust the contact motion unit and the contact motion
  • the height of the tip of at least one of the adjacent motion units near the unit is used to adjust the three-dimensional shape formed by the motion unit. Therefore, the adjustment method for the three-dimensional shape formed by each motion unit in the mechanical matrix is more flexible.
  • the height of the top is an absolute height
  • the plurality of motion units include a first motion unit and a second motion unit
  • the top of the at least one motion unit The adjustment of the height makes the first motion unit and the second motion unit form a concave structure
  • the height of the top of the first motion unit is smaller than the height of the top of the second motion unit
  • the second motion A unit surrounds the first motion unit, the first motion unit including the contact motion unit.
  • the height of the top of the motion unit is adjusted to form a recessed structure, and the target is located in the recess.
  • adjusting the height of the top of the motion unit in the mechanical matrix to form a shelf when the motion unit is in contact with the target can reduce the space occupied by the shelf.
  • the first motion unit is the contact motion unit.
  • the first motion units located at the bottom of the concave structure are all in contact with the target, so that the bottom of the concave structure adapts to the shape of the target, provide stable support for the target, and improve the support stability for placed objects.
  • the second motion unit includes the adjacent motion unit.
  • the second motion unit surrounding the bottom of the concave structure is not in contact with the target, and the distance between the second motion unit and the first motion unit at the bottom of the concave structure is less than or equal to a preset value, so that the shape and size of the concave structure are adapted to
  • the shape of the target improves the support stability of the mechanical matrix for placed items and prevents the target from shaking.
  • the mechanical matrix is located in the vehicle, and the method further includes: acquiring bump information, the bump information is used to indicate the vibration direction and the vibration distance of the vehicle vibration, the The vibration direction is a direction perpendicular to the sea level, and the vibration distance is used to indicate the absolute height change of the vehicle along the vibration direction; according to the bump information, an adjusted height difference is determined, and the adjusted height difference is the same as The vibration distance is positively correlated; the adjusting the height of the top of at least one of the motion units according to the contact information includes: adjusting the height of the top of the contact motion unit in a direction opposite to the vibration direction, The height variation of the contact motion unit is the adjusted height difference.
  • the absolute height of the vehicle changes.
  • the height of the contact motion unit is adjusted so that the top of the contact motion unit moves relative to the vehicle.
  • the top of the contact motion unit moves in the direction opposite to the vibration direction of the vehicle, and the height change difference of the contact motion unit is positively correlated with the vibration distance of the vehicle.
  • the change range of the absolute distance of the target is reduced, and the bumps suffered by the target are reduced.
  • the mechanical matrix is located in a vehicle, and the method further includes: acquiring bump indication information, where the bump indication information is used to indicate that the vehicle is in a bump state;
  • the contact information, adjusting the height of the top of at least one of the motion units includes: adjusting the height of the top of the contact motion unit according to the bump indication information and the first contact information output by the first sensor, so that The difference between the first pressure and the second pressure is the smallest, the first sensor is arranged on the top of the contact motion unit, the first contact information is used to indicate the first pressure, and the first pressure is at the top of the contact motion unit.
  • the pressure received by the contact motion unit when the vehicle is in the turbulent state, and the second pressure is the pressure received by the contact motion unit when the vehicle is in a smooth running state.
  • the height of the top of the contact motion unit in the mechanical matrix is controlled to minimize the difference in the pressure on the contact motion unit when the vehicle is in a bumpy state and in a smooth driving state, which can reduce the bumps on the target at the top of the contact motion unit.
  • the target is an electronic display device
  • the contact motion unit forms a bracket
  • the bracket is used to set the orientation of the target.
  • the goal is electronic display equipment, control the mechanical matrix to form a bracket, adjust the orientation of electronic display equipment, and improve user experience.
  • the method further includes: determining that the target is an electronic display device according to the contact information.
  • Judging based on the contact information provides a convenient way to judge whether the target is an electronic display device.
  • head position information is acquired, the head position information is used to indicate the position of the user's head, and the bracket makes the target face the user head.
  • the height of the top of the motion unit in the mechanical matrix is controlled to form a bracket.
  • the formed bracket makes the target face the user's head, which can improve user experience.
  • the mechanical matrix may be located in the vehicle, and the head position information may be determined from images collected by cameras in the vehicle.
  • the head posture information is used to indicate the symmetry plane of the user's head; determine the target position according to the head posture information , the position of the target is located on the plane of symmetry; the adjusting the height of the top of at least one of the motion units includes: adjusting the height of at least one of the motion units to form a slope, so that the target slides to the target position, the bracket is located at the target position.
  • Setting the electronic display device on the symmetrical plane of the head can make the distance between the user's eyes and the electronic display device equal, thereby improving user experience.
  • the target slides on the slope so that the bottom of the target is perpendicular to the symmetry plane; the support is formed so that the target wraps around the bottom While rotating, the target after rotating around the bottom faces the user's head.
  • the height of the top of the motion unit below the target can be adjusted to make the target rotate around the direction perpendicular to the bottom edge on the display plane of the target, so that the bottom edge of the target is perpendicular to the symmetry plane , that is, make the bottom edge of the target parallel to the line connecting the eyes.
  • the height of the top end of the motion unit below the target is adjusted so that the target turns along the bottom edge to form a stand.
  • the mechanical array is used to display an image
  • the multiple motion units correspond to multiple pixels of the image
  • the method further includes: according to the contact information, Adjusting the color of at least one pixel, where the at least one pixel is a pixel corresponding to at least one of the contact motion unit and the adjacent motion unit.
  • the color of each pixel can also be adjusted according to the contact information output by the support structure, making the control of the mechanical matrix more flexible.
  • a method for controlling a mechanical matrix includes a plurality of motion units, each of the motion units is provided with a sensor, and the sensor is used to output contact information, and the contact information is used to indicate Setting whether the top of the movement unit of the sensor is in contact with the target, the method includes: acquiring button formation information; adjusting the first movement unit and the second movement unit among the plurality of movement units according to the button formation information; The height of the top of at least one of the motion units in the units is used to form a button.
  • the height of the top of the first motion unit located in the area where the button is located is the same as the height of the top of the second motion unit.
  • the heights are different, the second motion unit surrounds the first motion unit; output key information, the key information is determined according to the contact information output by the sensor provided on the first motion unit.
  • the mechanical matrix can be controlled to form a button only when there is a need for the button, and the button information can be determined according to the contact information output by the sensor set on each motion unit in the mechanical matrix, so that the human-computer interaction function of the mechanical matrix can be realized and improved. Wide range of mechanical matrix applications.
  • the method further includes: acquiring button elimination information; and adjusting at least one of the first movement unit and the second movement unit according to the button elimination information. The height of the top of the motion unit to eliminate the button.
  • Buttons can be eliminated without requiring user input, thereby reducing the space occupied by buttons.
  • a control device for a mechanical matrix includes a plurality of motion units, each motion unit is provided with a sensor, and the control device includes: an acquisition module, configured to acquire the plurality of motion units The contact information output by the sensor provided above is used to indicate whether the top of the motion unit is in contact with the target; the adjustment module is used to adjust the height of at least one top of the motion unit according to the contact information, and the At least one motion unit includes a contact motion unit and/or an adjacent motion unit, the tip of the contact motion unit is in contact with the target, and the distance between the adjacent motion unit and the contact motion unit is less than a preset value.
  • the height of the top is an absolute height
  • the plurality of motion units include a first motion unit and a second motion unit
  • the top of the at least one motion unit The adjustment of the height makes the first motion unit and the second motion unit form a concave structure
  • the height of the top of the first motion unit is smaller than the height of the top of the second motion unit
  • the second motion The unit surrounds the first movement unit, and in the adjusted mechanical array, the first movement unit includes the contact movement unit.
  • the first motion unit is the contact motion unit.
  • the second motion unit includes the adjacent motion unit.
  • the mechanical matrix is located in the vehicle, and the acquiring module is further configured to acquire bump information, where the bump information is used to indicate the vibration direction and vibration distance of the vehicle vibration , the vibration direction is a direction perpendicular to the sea level, the vibration distance is used to indicate the absolute height change of the vehicle along the vibration direction;
  • the control device also includes a processing module for The jolt information is used to determine the adjusted height difference, and the adjusted height difference is positively correlated with the vibration distance;
  • the adjustment module is also used to adjust the height of the top end of the contact motion unit in a direction opposite to the vibration direction, The height variation of the contact motion unit is the adjusted height difference.
  • the mechanical matrix is located in the vehicle, and the control device further includes a processing module, the processing module is used to determine that the vehicle is in a bumpy state; the adjustment module also uses Therefore, according to the first contact information output by the first sensor, the height of the tip of the contact motion unit is adjusted to minimize the difference between the first pressure and the second pressure, the first contact information is used to indicate the A first pressure, where the first pressure is the pressure that the contact motion unit receives when the vehicle is in the bumpy state, and the second pressure is the pressure that the contact motion unit receives when the vehicle is in a smooth running state pressure.
  • the contact motion unit forms a bracket, and the bracket is used to set the orientation of the target .
  • control device further includes a processing module, configured to determine, according to the contact information, that the target is an electronic display device.
  • the acquiring module is further configured to acquire head position information, the head position information is used to indicate the position of the user's head, and the bracket enables The target is directed toward the user's head.
  • the acquisition module is further configured to acquire head posture information, where the head posture information is used to indicate the symmetry plane of the user's head; the processing The module is also used to determine a target position according to the head posture information, and the target position is located on the symmetry plane; the adjustment module is also used to adjust the height of at least one of the motion units to form a slope, so that The target slides to the target position, and the bracket is located at the target position.
  • the head posture information is also used to indicate the user's direct gaze direction, and the sliding and turning of the target on the slope makes the bottom edge of the target perpendicular to the direct viewing direction; the bracket is formed such that the bottom edge is perpendicular to the plane of symmetry and the target faces the user's head.
  • the mechanical array is used to display an image
  • the multiple motion units correspond to multiple pixels in the image
  • the adjustment module is further configured to, according to the The contact information is to adjust the color of at least one pixel
  • the at least one pixel is a pixel corresponding to at least one of the contact motion unit and the adjacent motion unit.
  • a control device for a mechanical matrix includes a plurality of motion units, each of the motion units is provided with a sensor, the sensor is used to output contact information, and the contact information is used to indicate Whether the top of the motion unit is in contact with the target
  • the control device includes: an acquisition module, configured to acquire button formation information; an adjustment module, configured to adjust the first motion unit among the plurality of motion units according to the button formation information , the height of the top of at least one of the second motion units to form a button, the second motion unit surrounds the first motion unit, and in the adjusted mechanical matrix, the first motion The height of the top of the unit is different from the height of the top of the second motion unit; the output module is used to output key information, and the key information is determined according to the contact information output by the sensor provided on the first motion unit of.
  • an electronic device including at least one memory and at least one processor, the at least one memory is used to store a program, and the at least one processor is used to run the program, so as to implement the first aspect.
  • a chip which is characterized in that it includes at least one processor and an interface circuit, the interface circuit is used to provide program instructions or data for the at least one processor, and the at least one processor is used to execute the The above program instructions are used to implement the method described in the first aspect.
  • a computer-readable storage medium stores program code for execution by a device, and when the program code is executed by the device, the method described in the first aspect is implemented .
  • a computer program product includes a computer program, and when the computer program product is executed by a computer, the computer executes the method in the aforementioned first aspect.
  • the method in the first aspect may specifically refer to the first aspect and the method in any of the various implementation manners in the first aspect.
  • a tenth aspect provides a terminal, including the mechanical matrix of the first aspect, and the control device of the mechanical matrix of the fourth aspect, the control device of the mechanical matrix of the fifth aspect, or the electronic device of the sixth aspect .
  • the terminal can be transportation equipment, such as cars, trucks, motorcycles, buses, boats, airplanes, helicopters, lawn mowers, recreational vehicles, playground vehicles, construction equipment, trams, golf carts, Trains, trolleys, etc.
  • transportation equipment such as cars, trucks, motorcycles, buses, boats, airplanes, helicopters, lawn mowers, recreational vehicles, playground vehicles, construction equipment, trams, golf carts, Trains, trolleys, etc.
  • Fig. 1 is a schematic structural diagram of a mechanical matrix provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 2 is a schematic flowchart of a method for controlling a mechanical matrix provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 3 is a schematic flowchart of another method for controlling a mechanical matrix provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 4 is a schematic flowchart of a method for determining an electronic display device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 5 is a schematic structural diagram of a mechanical matrix provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 6 is a schematic structural diagram of another mechanical matrix provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 7 is a schematic structural diagram of another mechanical matrix provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 8 is a schematic flowchart of another method for controlling a mechanical matrix provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • 9 to 13 are schematic structural diagrams of the mechanical matrix provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 14 is a schematic flowchart of another method for controlling a mechanical matrix provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 15 is a schematic structural diagram of a mechanical matrix provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 16 is a schematic flowchart of another method for controlling a mechanical matrix provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 17 is a schematic structural diagram of a mechanical matrix provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 18 is a schematic flowchart of another method for controlling a mechanical matrix provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 19 is a schematic flowchart of another method for controlling a mechanical matrix provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 20 is a schematic flowchart of another method for controlling a mechanical matrix provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 21 is a schematic structural diagram of a vehicle-mounted system provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 22 is a schematic structural diagram of a mechanical matrix control device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 23 is a schematic structural diagram of another mechanical matrix control device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 24 is a schematic structural diagram of another mechanical matrix control device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the mechanical matrix includes multiple matrix units, and each matrix unit can move bidirectionally along a straight line, that is, the height of each matrix unit is adjustable.
  • the mechanical matrix can be used to display text, graphics, changing animations, etc. By controlling the height of each matrix unit in the mechanical matrix, various three-dimensional graphic effects can be changed. The control of the mechanical matrix and the cooperation of the lighting and audio media bring the audience a good audio-visual and visual experience.
  • the three-dimensional shape formed by the mechanical matrix is preset, and the adjustment method of the three-dimensional shape has low flexibility.
  • embodiments of the present application provide a mechanical matrix, and a control method and device for the mechanical matrix.
  • Fig. 1 is a schematic structural diagram of a mechanical matrix provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the mechanical matrix 100 includes a plurality of motion units 110 , and the height of the top of each motion unit 110 is adjustable.
  • the height of the top of the motion unit 110 may be used to indicate the distance between the top of the motion unit 110 and the reference plane.
  • the reference plane may be a horizontal plane, or may have a certain angle with the horizontal plane.
  • Each motion unit 110 is provided with a sensor 120 for outputting contact information.
  • the contact information is used to indicate whether the tip of the motion unit 110 is in contact with the target.
  • each sensor is used to indicate whether the tip of the motion unit on which the sensor is disposed is in contact with the target.
  • the contact information output by the sensor can indicate whether the tip of the motion unit on which the sensor is installed is in contact with the target, thus making the control of the three-dimensional shape formed by the mechanical matrix more flexible.
  • the sensor can continuously output contact information, indicating whether the tip of the motion unit is in contact with the target through different information contents.
  • the sensor may output contact information only if the tip of the motion unit is in contact with the target.
  • the sensor may output contact information only if the tip of the motion unit is not in contact with the target.
  • the height of the top of each movement unit 110 can be adjusted according to the contact condition between the top of each movement unit 110 and the target, so that the three-dimensional shape formed by the mechanical matrix changes according to the contact condition with the target.
  • each motion unit can be a structure with a fixed shape, or a structure with an adjustable shape.
  • the shape of the motion unit may be columnar or similar to a column, and the motion unit may move along the longitudinal direction of the column, so that the height of the top of the motion unit can be adjusted.
  • the motion unit can be a telescopic structure, the bottom end of the motion unit can be fixed, and the height adjustment to the top of the motion unit can be realized through the expansion and contraction of the motion unit.
  • the sensor 120 may be a pressure sensor, an optical sensor, or the like.
  • the pressure sensor may be disposed at the top or bottom of the motion unit 110 .
  • the contact information output by the pressure sensor can be used to indicate the magnitude of the pressure. If the pressure indicated by the contact information output by the pressure sensor is greater than or equal to the preset value, it can be determined that the motion unit setting the sensor is in contact with the target; conversely, if the pressure indicated by the contact information output by the pressure sensor is less than the preset value, it can be determined The motion unit on which this sensor is set is not in contact with the target.
  • An optical sensor may be disposed on the top of the motion unit 110 .
  • the contact information output by the optical sensor can be used to indicate the magnitude of the light intensity.
  • the light intensity indicated by the contact information output by the optical sensor is less than or equal to the preset value, it can be determined that the motion unit setting the sensor is in contact with the target; otherwise, if the light intensity indicated by the contact information output by the optical sensor is greater than the preset value, then It can be determined that the motion unit on which the sensor is provided is not in contact with the target.
  • the mechanical matrix 100 can be controlled by the method shown in FIG. 2 .
  • Fig. 2 is a schematic flowchart of a method for controlling a mechanical matrix provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the mechanical matrix includes multiple motion units, each of which is provided with a sensor. Specifically, reference may be made to the description of FIG. 1 .
  • the control method 1000 of the mechanical matrix includes steps S1010 to S1020.
  • the at least one motion unit includes a contact motion unit and/or an adjacent motion unit, and the top of the contact motion unit is in contact with the target , the distance between the adjacent motion unit and the contact motion unit is smaller than a preset value.
  • the contact information output by the sensor is used to indicate whether the motion unit is in contact with the target, and in the case of the motion unit being in contact with the target, adjust the height of the top of the motion unit to adjust the three-dimensional shape formed by the motion unit . Therefore, the adjustment method for the three-dimensional shape formed by each motion unit in the mechanical matrix is more flexible.
  • the height of the top of the motion unit 110 can be adjusted according to the contact between the top of each motion unit and the target, so that the three-dimensional shape formed by the mechanical matrix changes with the contact with the target.
  • the sensors at the top of each motion unit forming the three-dimensional shape output contact information.
  • the adjustment mode corresponding to the user operation may be determined according to the contact information output by each sensor, and the height of the top of each motion unit may be adjusted.
  • Mechanical Matrix can be used for storage.
  • the height of the top of each motion unit refers to the absolute height.
  • Absolute height also known as altitude, refers to the vertical distance from the sea level, or the height with the mean sea level as the reference plane.
  • the first motion unit and the second motion unit form a concave structure.
  • the height of the top of the first motion unit is smaller than the height of the top of the second motion unit, and the second motion unit surrounds the first motion unit.
  • the first motion unit includes the contact motion unit.
  • the first movement unit includes a contact movement unit, that is, the target is located in the recessed structure, so that the recessed structure can limit the movement range of the target and improve the stability when placing objects.
  • the shape of the storage rack is fixed, and when the user does not place items in the storage rack, the storage rack takes up space.
  • the height of the motion unit is adjusted to form a recessed structure, that is, a shelf is formed.
  • the storage rack is formed when items are placed, thereby reducing the space occupied by the storage rack.
  • the first motion unit may include all contact motion units in the mechanical array.
  • the number of targets placed on the mechanical matrix can be multiple. Successive contact motion units can be understood as corresponding to one target. Therefore, the height of the top of each movement unit can be adjusted to form a concave structure corresponding to each target. In the following, the number of targets is taken as an example for description.
  • the first motion unit includes a contact motion unit.
  • the first motion unit may only include contact motion units, may also include adjacent motion units, and may also include other motion units.
  • Each of the first motion units may be a contact motion unit.
  • the first motion units located below the target are all in contact with the target, providing stable support for the target, and improving the stability of placed objects.
  • the second motion unit may include an adjacent motion unit. That is to say, the distance between the second movement unit and the first movement unit may be less than or equal to a preset value.
  • the distance between the second movement unit located around the target and the first movement unit located below the target is less than or equal to a preset value, so that the shape and size of the recessed structure adapt to the shape of the target and improve the stability of placed items.
  • the mechanical matrix may be located in the vehicle.
  • Vehicles can be vehicles such as cars, trucks, motorcycles, buses, boats, airplanes, helicopters, lawn mowers, recreational vehicles, playground vehicles, construction equipment, trams, golf carts, trains, trolleys, etc. Examples are not particularly limited.
  • the height of the contact motion unit placed under the target on the mechanical matrix can be adjusted to reduce the bumps on the target.
  • bump information may be acquired, the bump information is used to indicate the vibration direction and vibration distance of the vehicle vibration, the vibration direction is a direction perpendicular to the sea level.
  • the adjusted height difference may be determined according to the turbulence information, and the adjusted height difference is positively correlated with the shaking distance.
  • the height of the top end of the contact motion unit can be adjusted in a direction opposite to the vibration direction, and the height change of the contact motion unit is the adjusted height difference.
  • the height of the top of the first motion unit is adjusted in the direction opposite to the vibration direction, and the adjusted height difference is positively related to the vibration distance of the vehicle bumps, thereby reducing the distance between the target and the sea level
  • the range of change can reduce the turbulence suffered by the target.
  • the contact movement unit may change. For example, at time t0, the moving unit in contact with the target is the touching moving unit 1 . At time t0, the height of the contact motion unit 1 is lowered. During the descending process of the contact motion unit 1 , the motion units other than the contact motion unit 1 contact the target. For example, at time t1 during the descent of the contact movement unit 1 , the movement unit in contact with the target is the contact movement unit 2 .
  • the contact sport unit 2 may include all or part of the contact sport unit 1 , and the contact sport unit 2 may also include other contact sport units other than the contact sport unit 1 .
  • the new target unit that is in contact with the target can also be used as the contact motion unit for height adjustment.
  • the height of the tip of the contact motion unit may be adjusted according to the first contact information output by the first sensor in the bumpy state of the vehicle, so that the difference between the first pressure and the second pressure is minimized , the first contact information is used to indicate the first pressure, the first pressure is the pressure on the contact motion unit when the vehicle is in the bumpy state, and the second pressure is the pressure when the vehicle is in a smooth running state The pressure on the contact motion unit in the state.
  • the first sensor may be provided at the contact motion unit.
  • the second pressure may be the pressure output by the first sensor when the vehicle is in the bumpy state.
  • the second pressure may also be an average value of the pressure output by the first sensor within a period of time.
  • the difference between the first pressure on the contact motion unit in a bumpy state and the second pressure on the contact motion unit in a smooth driving situation can be reduced.
  • the bumps on the small target By adjusting the height of the top end of the contact motion unit during the bumping process of the vehicle, the difference between the first pressure on the contact motion unit in a bumpy state and the second pressure on the contact motion unit in a smooth driving situation can be reduced. The bumps on the small target.
  • the positive correlation coefficient between the adjustment height difference and the vibration distance can be adjusted according to the difference between the first pressure on the contact motion unit in a bumpy state and the second pressure on the contact motion unit in a smooth driving state, so that Correct the adjustment height difference to further reduce the turbulence suffered by the target.
  • the pressure on the contact motion unit can be understood as the pressure component in the vertical direction.
  • the orientation of the electronic display device can also be adjusted by adjusting the height of the motion unit in the mechanical matrix.
  • the contact motion unit forms a bracket, and the bracket is used to set the orientation of the target.
  • the target is an electronic display device according to the contact information output by each sensor.
  • the bracket can make the target face a certain preset direction.
  • head position information may be acquired, where the head position information is used to indicate the position of the user's head.
  • the brace is formed so that the target is directed toward the user's head.
  • the head position information may be determined according to the image information collected by the camera.
  • the mechanical matrix can be located around the driver's seat in the vehicle, and cameras in the vehicle can capture images of the driver's head so that the position of the driver's head can be determined. Head position information may be used to indicate the driver's head position.
  • the head pose information may include the orientation of the user's face. According to the head posture information and the head position information, the symmetry plane of the user's head can be determined.
  • a target position may be determined according to the head posture information, and the target position is located on the symmetry plane.
  • the height of at least one of the moving units may be adjusted to form a slope, so that the target slides to the target position.
  • a stent can be located at the target location. That is, the bracket can be used to set the orientation of the target at the target location.
  • Setting the electronic display device on the symmetrical plane of the head can make the distance between the user's eyes and the electronic display device equal, thereby improving user experience.
  • the head posture information is also used to indicate the direct-looking direction of the user.
  • the formed slope can also change the angle between the bottom edge of the target and the direct viewing direction. After the target slides on the slope, the bottom edge of the target may be perpendicular to the direct viewing direction.
  • the bracket is formed so that the target can rotate around the bottom edge, and the target rotated around the bottom edge faces the user's head.
  • the sliding of the target By adjusting the height of the top of the motor unit, the sliding of the target can be made.
  • the sliding of the target makes the plane perpendicular to the display plane of the target where the bottom edge of the target is located be perpendicular to the symmetry plane of the user's head. That is, the object slides so that the bottom edge of the object is parallel to the plane of the user's face.
  • the support can be formed so that the bottom edge of the target can be perpendicular to the symmetry plane and make the target face the user's head.
  • the target may be perpendicular to the symmetry plane of the user's head after sliding on the slope.
  • Multiple motion units may correspond to multiple pixels of an image, and different pixels may display the same or different colors.
  • the color corresponding to each motion unit can also be adjusted. That is to say, according to the contact information, the color of at least one pixel may be adjusted, and the at least one pixel is a pixel corresponding to at least one of the contact motion unit and the adjacent motion unit. .
  • the adjustment method for the image displayed in the three-dimensional shape formed by each motion unit in the mechanical matrix is more flexible.
  • Fig. 3 is a schematic flowchart of a method for controlling a mechanical matrix provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • a cup holder is generally designed. During the running of the vehicle, items such as water cups can be placed in the cup holder, which can prevent the water cups from toppling over due to bumps during the running of the vehicle.
  • the cup holder can also be used as a storage space for storing mobile phones, keys and other personal belongings, which is very convenient.
  • the mechanical matrix may be located in the cabin of the vehicle.
  • the mechanical matrix can be located between the driver's and passenger's seats, or it can be located elsewhere, such as at the rear seats.
  • the mechanical matrix can be at the same height as the seat, or it can be slightly higher or lower than the seat height to facilitate placement of items on the mechanical matrix by the driver or other vehicle users.
  • a mechanical matrix can include multiple motion units. It is illustrated by taking each motion unit of the mechanical matrix as a support rod with the same shape as an example. In the mechanical matrix, multiple support rods are arranged in a matrix, and each support rod can move up and down along the longitudinal direction of the support rod. Items can be placed on the Mechanical Matrix.
  • the mechanical matrix can also be called a storage array or a storage table, etc.
  • the control method 200 of the mechanical matrix may be performed by a surface control module.
  • the control method 200 of the mechanical matrix includes S210-S250.
  • Each support rod can be moved above or below the initial horizontal plane.
  • a support rod whose tip is located in the initial plane is located in the middle of the range of motion of the support rod.
  • Targets can be items placed on the Mechanical Matrix by the driver or other members of the vehicle.
  • each support rod is provided with a sensor.
  • a sensor For example, it could be a pressure sensor or a light sensor.
  • the surface control module can receive the information output by each sensor, and determine the support rod in contact with the target according to the information output by each sensor.
  • the pressure sensor is used to sense the pressure signal and convert the pressure signal into an electrical signal for output.
  • the pressure indicated by the output signal of the pressure sensor at the top of the support rod is greater than or equal to a preset value, it is determined that the top of the support rod is in contact with the target.
  • the light sensor is used to sense the light intensity signal and convert the light intensity signal into an electrical signal for output.
  • the light intensity indicated by the output signal of the light sensor at the top of the support rod is less than a preset value, it is determined that the top of the support rod is in contact with the target.
  • Whether the target is an electronic display device can be determined according to the shape of the area where the support rod in contact with the target is located.
  • the sensor provided on the support rod is a pressure sensor
  • the size information and quality information of electronic display devices such as smart phones and tablet computers can be combined to determine whether the target is an electronic display device. Specifically, reference may be made to the description of FIG. 3 .
  • the stand mode adjusts the height of the support bar to form a stand so that the display surface of the electronic display device faces the driver. Specifically, reference may be made to the description of FIG. 4 .
  • adjusting the height of the support rod so that the surface of the target for display faces the driver can improve the convenience of the driver when using the electronic display device.
  • Adjusting the height of the support rod in the object placement mode can form a recessed structure, so that the target is located in the recessed structure, so that the position of the target is fixed. Specifically, reference may be made to the description of FIG. 8 .
  • the target By adjusting multiple support rods and fixing the position of the target, the target can be prevented from falling from the mechanical matrix when the vehicle is driving in a bumpy environment.
  • Fig. 4 is a schematic flowchart of a method for determining an electronic display device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the electronic display device judging method 300 includes S310-S330, which can be executed by the surface control module.
  • the surface control module can determine whether the target is an electronic display device by executing the electronic display device judging method 300.
  • the target is located on the mechanical matrix, as shown in Figure 5. According to the information output by the sensors provided on each support pole, the support pole in contact with the target can be determined. The area where the support rods are in contact with the target may be referred to as the contact area. At this time, the contact situation between the target and each support rod can be as shown in FIG. 6 .
  • Each support rod can be represented as a point, the support rod not in contact with the target is represented by a hollow point, and the point in contact with the target is represented by a solid point.
  • S310 it is determined whether the target bottom surface is a rectangle. Specifically, S311-S313 may be performed.
  • the electronic display device is generally rectangular, and the points with the largest coordinates and the smallest coordinates in the contact area in two perpendicular directions can be determined as vertices respectively.
  • each vertex of the contact area can be expressed as: the uppermost point (x t , y t ) in the longitudinal direction, the lowermost point (x d , y d ) in the longitudinal direction, and the leftmost point in the horizontal direction Point (x l , y l ), the rightmost point in the horizontal direction (x r , y r ).
  • the edges of the contact area are determined according to the vertices.
  • the set of edge points includes: the edge contact point on the left side of each row that is in contact with the target, the edge contact point on the right side of each row that is in contact with the target, and the edge contact point on the upper side of each column that is in contact with the target point, the edge contact point on the lower side of each column where the lowermost side contacts the target.
  • the edge contact point that is, the point at the edge position among the points in contact with the target.
  • the expression of the edge L1 of the contact area can be obtained by fitting a straight line to the points whose x coordinates are between x l and x t and y coordinates y l and y t in the edge point set.
  • the expression of the edge L2 of the contact area can be obtained by fitting a straight line to the points whose x coordinates are between x r and x t and y coordinates y r and y t in the edge point set.
  • the expression of the edge L3 of the contact area can be obtained by fitting a straight line to the points whose x coordinates are between x l and x d and y coordinates y l and y d in the edge point set.
  • the expression of the edge L4 of the contact area can be obtained by fitting a straight line to the points whose x coordinates are between x r and x d and y coordinates y r and y d in the edge point set.
  • each point can be expressed as ( xi , y i ), x i ⁇ [1, N], y i ⁇ [1, N], i, N are positive integers.
  • the following formula can be used for straight line fitting:
  • a and b are the parameters of the fitted straight line expression.
  • the straight line expression of the edge can be determined, that is, each edge of the contact area is determined, as shown in FIG. 7 .
  • the shape of the mechanical matrix may be rectangular. Possible parts of the target area may extend beyond the edge of the mechanical matrix. For example, a corner of a rectangular electronic display device may extend beyond the left edge of the mechanical matrix. In this case, a plurality of support rods located on the left edge of the mechanical matrix are in contact with the electronic display device.
  • the uppermost point among the multiple support rods on the left edge that is in contact with the target can be taken as a horizontal leftmost point (x l1 , y l1 ), combined with the vertical uppermost point (x t , y t ), to calculate the expression; and the lowest point among the multiple support rods that are in contact with the target on the left edge is taken as another horizontal leftmost point (x l2 , y l2 ), combined with the vertical lowest point (x d , y d ), calculate the expression of edge L3.
  • L1 to L4 are grouped, and the lines in each group are obtained from completely different vertices.
  • L1 to L4 can be divided into two groups, and each group includes two sides, wherein, the side L1 obtained from the uppermost point and the leftmost point and the side L4 obtained from the lowermost point and the rightmost point form a group, and according to the uppermost point and the most The side L2 obtained from the right point and the side L3 obtained from the bottommost point and the leftmost point form a group.
  • the inclination angle of each edge can be calculated.
  • the preset value may be 2°, for example.
  • the target base can be determined to be rectangular. That is, when arctan b 1 -arctan b 4
  • is a preset angle value, for example, it may be 1°, 2° or 3°.
  • the target is not an electronic display device, and S250 is performed.
  • the length and width of the target can be calculated according to the four sides L1 to L4, so as to determine the aspect ratio of the target.
  • the length l of the target can be expressed as:
  • the width d of the target can be expressed as:
  • the preset ratio range may be determined according to known aspect ratios of electronic display devices. As shown in Table 1, are the parameters of different types of electronic display devices.
  • the preset ratio range may be greater than or equal to a minimum value among known aspect ratios of various types of electronic display devices, and less than or equal to a maximum value among known aspect ratios of various types of electronic display devices.
  • the target is not an electronic display device, and S250 is performed.
  • the area of the target bottom surface may be determined according to the sides of the contact area.
  • the contact area is rectangular, and the area of the bottom surface of the target is the area of the contact area.
  • the contact area is not a rectangle, and it can be accurately judged whether the target is an electronic device according to the area of the bottom surface of the target determined by the contact area.
  • the preset pressure range may be greater than or equal to the minimum value and the maximum value of the known pressures when multiple types of electronic display devices are placed on a horizontal plane.
  • is the density of the struts.
  • the judgment of whether the ratio of the gravity of the target to the target area meets the preset pressure range can also be converted to support rods covering the target Judgment under pressure.
  • the target is an electronic display device, and S240 is performed.
  • Fig. 8 is a schematic flowchart of a method for controlling a mechanical matrix provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the surface control module may perform S410-S420 to implement the method S240.
  • the driver's head posture is acquired.
  • the origin of the head coordinate system is the center of the driver's head
  • the x-axis is the horizontal direction perpendicular to the driver's direct viewing direction
  • the z-axis is the direct viewing direction from the origin to the driver
  • the y-axis is perpendicular to the x-axis and aligned with
  • the direction vertical to the y-axis, the y-axis may be a direction pointing to the top of the driver's head.
  • the driver's direct gaze direction can also be understood as the driver's frontal gaze direction, which may be a direction perpendicular or approximately perpendicular to the plane where the driver's eyes and mouth are located.
  • a driver monitoring system can determine the pose of the driver's head.
  • DMS is a system based on image processing technology and/or voice processing technology to monitor the status of the driver in the car, mainly used to ensure driving safety and improve driving experience.
  • DMS can achieve driver identity recognition or driver status detection based on image recognition algorithms, computer vision algorithms, eye sight tracking, pupil detection and other technologies.
  • Driver state detection includes detection of the pose of the driver's head.
  • the DMS can acquire the images collected by the camera.
  • DMS can image the driver's head and eyes, so as to determine the position of the driver's head and eyes.
  • a DMS can use a neural network model to process images captured by a camera to determine the position of the driver's head and eyes.
  • the position of the driver's head can be expressed as the position of the driver's head in the vehicle body coordinate system.
  • the position of the driver's eyes can be expressed as the position of the driver's eyes in the vehicle body coordinate system, or as the relative position between the driver's eyes and the driver's head. Based on the relative position of the driver's head and eyes, the driver's attitude can be determined.
  • the surface control module can send a detection request to the DMS.
  • the DMS detects the pose of the driver's head based on the detection request.
  • the DMS can send the pose of the driver's head to the surface control module.
  • the signal transmission between the surface control module and the DMS can be forwarded by a smart cockpit domain controller (cockpit domain controller, CDC) or a vehicle identification unit (vehicle identification unit, VIU).
  • the driver's head pose may be acquired when at least one support rod in the mechanical matrix is determined to be in contact with the target.
  • S420 may be performed by the surface control module. Specifically, S421 to S422 may be performed.
  • the target position is determined according to the driver's head posture.
  • the target location is within the driver's line of sight.
  • the target position may lie on a curve where the plane of symmetry of the driver's head intersects the surface of the mechanical matrix.
  • the target location may be where the direction the driver is looking directly intersects the surface of the mechanical matrix. It may be based on the driver's head posture to determine the direction the driver is looking directly at.
  • the target position can also be determined by the CDC and sent to the surface control module.
  • the target position can be used to represent the position of the origin of the device coordinate system in the vehicle coordinate system.
  • S422 may be performed. And after S422, S423 can be performed.
  • the electronic display device located on the slope slides from a higher position to a lower position under the action of gravity.
  • 9 and 10 show the slope formed by the support rods, and the position changes of the electronic display device on the slope.
  • the target can be set at the target position.
  • a device coordinate system of the electronic display device may be established, and the device coordinate system may be understood as a local coordinate system.
  • the origin of the device coordinate system may be the center of mass of the electronic display device or other positions on the electronic display device, and the z-axis direction of the device coordinate system is a direction perpendicular to the display surface of the electronic display device.
  • the display surface is rectangular, the x-axis can be the direction of the bottom, the y-axis can be the direction of the side adjacent to the bottom, and the origin of the device coordinate system is located at the center of the electronic display device.
  • the bottom side can be preset to be the long side or the short side in the long direction.
  • the display surface faces the driver, that is, the z-axis direction of the device coordinate system points to the driver.
  • the z-axis direction of the device coordinate system may be parallel to the z-axis direction of the head coordinate system.
  • the height of the support rod is adjusted to form a slope, and the electronic display device located on the slope can rotate under the action of gravity.
  • the height of the support rod can be adjusted to form a slope, so that the electronic display device can rotate along the z-axis of the device coordinate system.
  • the rotation of the electronic display device along the z-axis of the device coordinate system makes the projection of the x-axis of the device coordinate system on the x-y plane of the vehicle coordinate system parallel to the projection of the x-axis of the head coordinate system on the x-y plane of the vehicle coordinate system.
  • attitude of the electronic display device may also be adjusted during S422 or before S422 so that the x-axis of the device coordinate system is parallel to the projection of the x-axis of the head coordinate system on the x-y plane of the vehicle coordinate system. As shown in FIG.
  • the electronic display device before performing S422, the electronic display device is located at position P1, the distance between the projection of the x-axis of the device coordinate system on the x-y plane of the vehicle coordinate system and the projection of the x-axis of the head coordinate system on the x-y plane of the vehicle coordinate system The included angle is ⁇ , and ⁇ is greater than 0; after performing S422, the electronic display device is located at position P2, the projection of the x-axis of the device coordinate system on the x-y plane of the vehicle coordinate system and the projection of the x-axis of the head coordinate system on the x-y plane of the vehicle coordinate system parallel.
  • the height of the support rod can be adjusted to form a slope, so that the electronic display device rotates along the y-axis of the device coordinate system, and the x-axis of the device coordinate system of the electronic display device after rotating around the y-axis and the x-axis of the head coordinate system parallel.
  • the target is located at the target position, the target position is located on the symmetry plane of the driver's head, the projection of the x-axis of the device coordinate system on the x-y plane of the vehicle coordinate system is parallel to the projection of the x-axis of the head coordinate system on the x-y plane of the vehicle coordinate system, and
  • the z-axis of the device coordinate system is coplanar with the z-axis of the head coordinate system.
  • the height of the support rod is adjusted so that the electronic display device rotates along the x-axis of the device coordinate system, as shown in FIG. 12 .
  • the electronic display device rotated along the x-axis of the device coordinate system faces the driver.
  • the height adjustment of the support bar reduces the angle between the z-axis of the equipment coordinate system and the position of the electronic display device and the position of the driver's head, it can be understood that the height adjustment of the support bar makes the electronic display device face the driver.
  • the rotation of the electronic display device along the x-axis of the device coordinate system can make the z-axis of the device coordinate system parallel to the z-axis of the head coordinate system (shown by the solid line).
  • the rotation of the electronic display device along the x-axis of the device coordinate system may make the z-axis of the device coordinate system point to the position of the driver's head.
  • the x-axis of the head coordinate system is parallel or approximately parallel to the x-y plane of the vehicle coordinate system.
  • the normal of the mechanical matrix is generally set to be perpendicular to the x-y plane of the vehicle coordinate system. Therefore, when the projection of the x-axis of the device coordinate system on the x-y plane of the vehicle coordinate system is parallel to the projection of the x-axis of the head coordinate system on the x-y plane of the vehicle coordinate system, it can be considered that the x-axis of the device coordinate system is parallel to the head
  • the x-axis of the coordinate system is parallel.
  • brackets can be formed for adjusting the height of the support rods. The bracket makes the z-axis of the device coordinate system parallel to the projection of the z-axis of the head coordinate system on the y-z plane of the device coordinate system.
  • the CDC may also determine a target pose for the electronic display device.
  • the target pose can be used to indicate the orientation of each axis of the device coordinate system.
  • the target posture can be such that the projection of the x-axis of the device coordinate system on the x-y plane of the vehicle coordinate system is parallel to the projection of the x-axis of the head coordinate system on the x-y plane of the vehicle coordinate system, and the x-axis of the device coordinate system is parallel to the x-y plane of the head coordinate system. In the case of parallel axes, make the electronic display device face the driver's z-axis direction.
  • the CDC can send the target posture to the surface control module, so that the surface control module can adjust the height of the support rod according to the target posture to adjust the posture of the electronic display device, so that the adjusted posture of the electronic display device is the target posture.
  • the location where the user places the item may be recorded. Therefore, according to the user's usage habits, the height of the support bar can be adjusted under the condition that the mechanical matrix is in contact with the target, so that the target can slide to a corresponding position.
  • the position where the user places other items other than the electronic display device and the number of times the user places the other items at the position, as well as the number of times the user places the target position corresponding to the electronic display device and each target position can be recorded respectively. Thereby, common locations corresponding to other items and common target locations of electronic display devices are determined.
  • the mechanical matrix is in contact with the target, it can be determined whether the target is an electronic display device.
  • the height of the support rod can be adjusted so that the target slides to the usual position.
  • the height of the support rod can be adjusted so that the target slides to the usual target position. Therefore, the position of the slid target is more in line with the habit of the user.
  • Fig. 14 is a schematic flowchart of a method for controlling a mechanical matrix provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the surface control module may perform S510-S423 to implement the method S250.
  • the absolute heights corresponding to the lowest points of the various support rods in the mechanical matrix are the same.
  • the lowest point of each support bar may be preset.
  • the mechanical matrix is controlled according to the method in FIG. 14 , and the height change of the support rods in the mechanical matrix can be shown in FIG. 15 .
  • S511-S512 may be performed.
  • the undeclined struts can be understood as the struts in the mechanical matrix that have not been subjected to S511.
  • the support pole that descends to the lowest point is the support pole below the target.
  • Each support rod can be provided with a pressure sensor or a light sensor.
  • the support rod in contact with the target may be a support rod whose pressure sensor indicates that the pressure is greater than a preset value, or may also be a support rod whose light intensity is greater than a preset value indicated by a light sensor. That is to say, the pressure indicated by the pressure sensor of the support rod is very small, for example, when the pressure is 0, it is considered that the support rod is not in contact with the target; the light intensity indicated by the light sensor of the support rod is very small, for example, when the light intensity is 0, it is considered to be supported The rod makes contact with the target.
  • S510 may be executed by performing S513-S514.
  • the supporting rods below the target are all in contact with the target, or in a critical state of contact with the target.
  • the sensor at the top of the support rod continues to detect during the rising process of the support rod that has descended to the lowest point. When the support rod comes into contact with the target, the raising of the support rod is stopped.
  • the support rods that descend to the lowest point may be raised layer by layer outward.
  • the rising height of the support rod within the preset distance range may be an arithmetic progression.
  • the height at which the support rods that are not in contact with the target can be raised decreases as the distance from the support rods below the target increases.
  • the support poles within the preset distance range around the support poles that descend to the lowest point after S510 may contact the target during the rising process.
  • the support rod may not be raised again after touching the target.
  • the support rods below the target are all in contact with the target, providing stable support for the target at the bottom of the target.
  • the lateral support pole of the target is raised, providing stable support for the target in the lateral direction, and avoiding the target from tilting or falling over.
  • Fig. 16 is a schematic flowchart of a method for controlling a mechanical matrix provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the surface control module can control the mechanical matrix in the manner shown in FIG. 16 .
  • the control method 1600 of the mechanical matrix includes S1601-S1602.
  • the mechanical matrix includes a first support bar height, and the first support bar is in contact with the target.
  • the bump information is used to indicate the vibration direction and vibration distance of the vehicle vibration.
  • the vibration direction is up or down.
  • the vibration direction can point to the positive or negative direction of the z-axis of the vehicle coordinate system, and can also be vertically upward or vertically downward.
  • the vertical direction is the direction perpendicular to the horizon.
  • the bump information may be collected by a vehicle dynamics control system (VDC).
  • VDC vehicle dynamics control system
  • the surface control module can receive the bump information sent by VDC.
  • the thrashing information sent by the VDC can be forwarded via the CDC.
  • an adjustment direction and an adjustment height difference are determined according to the turbulence information, the adjustment direction is opposite to the vibration direction, and the adjustment height difference is positively correlated with the vibration distance.
  • the height of the first support bar is adjusted along the adjustment direction, and the height variation of the first support bar is the adjusted height difference.
  • the adjustment height difference is inversely proportional to the shock distance of the vehicle.
  • each support rod in the mechanical matrix can be adjusted along the adjustment direction, or the height of the first support rod in contact with the target and the support rods surrounding the first support rod within a preset distance range can be adjusted.
  • the cover degree is adjusted, and the height variation of each support rod is the adjusted height difference.
  • the sensor provided on the support rod may be a pressure sensor. After S1603, S1604 can be performed.
  • the height of the first support rod may be adjusted according to the pressure information output by the sensor provided on the first support rod.
  • the first support rod is the support rod that is in contact with the target.
  • the sensor provided on the first support rod is the first sensor.
  • the first contact information output by the first sensor is used to indicate the first pressure.
  • the first contact information output by the first sensor is used to indicate the second pressure.
  • the height of the first support rod is adjusted to minimize the difference between the first pressure and the second pressure.
  • S1601 to S1602 and S1604 determining the adjustment direction and distance required for adjusting the first support rod may be performed by the CDC.
  • the CDC can send the adjustment direction and the adjustment height difference to the surface control module.
  • the surface control module can determine the displacement of each support bar according to the adjustment direction and the adjustment height difference, and control the movement of the support bars.
  • Fig. 18 is a schematic flowchart of a method for controlling a mechanical matrix provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the mechanical matrix includes a plurality of support rods with the same shape, the multiple support rods are arranged in a matrix, and each support rod can move up and down.
  • a sensor is arranged at the top of each support rod.
  • the plurality of support rods corresponds to a plurality of pixels.
  • one or more struts may correspond to one pixel, or one strut may correspond to multiple pixels.
  • a display device may be provided on the top of each support rod, or projection may be performed on the mechanical matrix, so that the mechanical matrix may be used to display images, and multiple support rods may correspond to multiple pixels.
  • a display device is arranged on the top of each support bar, and each support bar corresponds to a pixel as an example for illustration.
  • the control method 1700 of the mechanical matrix includes S1701 to S1705.
  • the surface control module sends a surface control command to an electronic control unit (ECU).
  • ECU electronice control unit
  • Surface control commands are used to indicate the height and/or movement speed of each support rod in the display area.
  • the surface control instruction is also used to indicate the color of the pixel corresponding to each support bar in the display area.
  • the display area can be the area where all or part of the support rods in the mechanical matrix are located.
  • the display area may be an area other than the area where the item is located or the area where the button is located.
  • the ECU adjusts the mechanical matrix according to the surface control command.
  • the ECU can adjust the height of the support bar and the color of the pixels in the display area according to the surface control command.
  • the surface control module acquires contact information output by each sensor, where the contact information is used to indicate whether the support rod where the sensor is located is in contact with the target.
  • the surface control module sends an adjustment instruction to the ECU.
  • the ECU adjusts the adjustment mechanical matrix according to the adjustment instruction.
  • the ECU can adjust the height of the support bar and the color of the pixels in the display area according to the adjustment instruction.
  • the ECU can adjust the height of at least one support rod in the display area, and adjust the color of the pixel corresponding to the at least one support rod.
  • the CDC may send a generation instruction to the surface control module, and the surface control instruction may be determined according to the generation instruction.
  • the generation instruction may be used to indicate the shape, color, etc. formed by the support bars of the display area.
  • the surface control module may store the corresponding relationship between the generation instruction and the surface control instruction.
  • the CDC sends a generation instruction to the surface control module, the generation instruction is used to indicate the three-dimensional image of the cream cake.
  • the surface control module sends a surface control instruction corresponding to the three-dimensional image of the cream cake to the ECU.
  • the ECU can set the display area in the shape of a cream cake by setting the height of each support rod in the display area and the color of the pixel corresponding to each support rod.
  • the upper surface of the cake may include a plurality of protrusions, and the color of the raised areas may be different from the color of the flat areas of the upper surface of the cake.
  • the color of the flat area on the upper surface of the cake can be milky white (used to represent cream)
  • the raised shape can be text, the outline of a fruit, etc.
  • the color of the raised place can be red or the color of the fruit.
  • the CDC acquires the contact information output by each sensor to determine the support bar that is in contact with the target among the support bars forming the upper surface of the cake.
  • the adjustment command sent by the CDC may be used to instruct to lower the height of the support rods that are in contact with the target among the support rods forming the upper surface of the cake, so as to form a depression.
  • the adjustment instruction is also used to instruct to adjust the color of the pixel corresponding to the support rod in contact with the target to yellow or orange (used to represent the color of the cake under the cream).
  • the ECU may set a partial area of the display area as a plane by setting the height of each support rod in the display area.
  • the ECU dynamically sets the color of the pixels corresponding to each support rod, and this part of the display area can display a top view of the pond or lake. For example, this part of the area can show a dynamic scene of fish swimming in a pond.
  • the height of the support rod is adjusted according to the contact information sent by the sensor at the top of each support rod, and the color of the pixel corresponding to each support rod is adjusted, which can improve the display accuracy of the mechanical structure. Image flexibility.
  • the CDC may acquire user input information.
  • the user's input information may be used to indicate the stereoscopic image.
  • the CDC may send a generation instruction corresponding to the three-dimensional image indicated by the user to the surface control module according to the user's input information. Therefore, the user can select the stereoscopic image displayed by the mechanical matrix according to his preference.
  • Fig. 19 is a schematic flowchart of a method for controlling a mechanical matrix provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the mechanical matrix includes a plurality of motion units, each of which is provided with a sensor.
  • the sensor is used to output contact information, and the contact information is used to indicate whether the tip of the motion unit is in contact with the target.
  • contact information is used to indicate whether the tip of the motion unit is in contact with the target.
  • the control method 2200 of the mechanical matrix includes S2201 to S2203.
  • the surface control module may execute S2201 to S2203.
  • other modules in the device generate button formation information and store it in a cache unit or other storage unit
  • the surface control module in the device can read the button formation information from the cache unit or other storage unit.
  • the key information may be used to indicate the user's operation on the key.
  • buttons are more ergonomic than entering information on a flat surface and can improve user satisfaction.
  • the height of the top of the exercise unit 110 is adjusted to form a button.
  • the buttons are only formed when the user needs to input and perform the functions, which can reduce the occupation of space.
  • the user operation sensed by the sensor may be contact information output by the sensor provided on the support rod at the button.
  • the user operation sensed by the sensor may be determined according to the contact condition between the support rod at each button and the target.
  • the contact information output by the sensor can be used to indicate whether the support rod on which the sensor is set is in contact with the target. According to the contact information output by the sensors provided on the respective support rods where the buttons are located, the key sequence of the user at the multiple buttons, the pressing time of the user at each button, etc. can be determined.
  • the output key information may be sent to a processing unit for processing user operations.
  • the processing unit may send the button cancel information.
  • the surface control module can eliminate the formed button according to the button elimination information.
  • button cancellation information can be acquired.
  • the height of at least one of the motion units may be adjusted according to the button elimination information, so as to eliminate the button.
  • Elimination of the button can make the height of the first motion unit and the second motion unit the same.
  • the height of the motion unit can be adjusted in other ways to form a three-dimensional shape according to the button elimination information.
  • Fig. 20 is a schematic flowchart of a method for controlling a mechanical matrix provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the mechanical matrix includes a plurality of support rods with the same shape, the multiple support rods are arranged in the form of matrix, and each support rod can move up and down.
  • the top of each support rod is provided with a sensor.
  • the control method 2300 of the mechanical matrix includes S2301-S2308.
  • the CDC sends a button formation request to the surface control module.
  • the surface control module sends a button forming instruction to the ECU, and the button forming instruction is used to indicate the height of each support rod in the first area.
  • the first area forming the button should be different from where the item is placed.
  • the surface control module can record the positions of the items placed on the mechanical matrix.
  • the surface control module may determine the support rod in contact with the item according to the contact information sent by each sensor of the mechanical matrix when receiving the button formation request in S2301, so as to determine the position of the item.
  • the surface control module determines the first area outside the area where the item is located according to the location of the item.
  • the shape of the first area and the relative heights of the support rods at different positions in the first area may be preset.
  • the button forming instruction may instruct the height of each support bar in the first area to increase or decrease, to form a depression or a protrusion, so that the height of each support bar in the first area is different from other support bars around the first area.
  • the ECU controls the mechanical matrix forming button.
  • the ECU can adjust the height of each support bar in the first area of the mechanical matrix according to the button forming instruction, so as to form at least one button.
  • buttons may be formed.
  • the surface control module receives the contact information output by the sensors provided at the tops of the respective support rods in the first area, and determines user input information according to the contact information.
  • the surface control module can determine the support rods in contact with the user according to the contact information of the sensors provided at the tops of the respective support rods in the first area.
  • Whether or not the user presses the formed button may be determined according to the shape of the support bar in contact with the user.
  • the sensor arranged at the top of the support rod may be a pressure sensor. Whether or not the user presses the formed button may be determined based on the pressure sensed by the respective sensors. For example, when the pressure sensed by each sensor is within a preset range, it is determined that the user presses the button.
  • the user's input information may be determined according to the order in which each support bar in the first area contacts the user, the order in which the user presses or touches the plurality of buttons, or the user's sliding operation, etc.
  • the surface control module sends the user's input information to the CDC.
  • the CDC sends response information to the surface control module.
  • the surface control module sends a button removal instruction to the ECU according to the response information, and the button removal instruction is used to indicate the height of each support rod in the first area.
  • the ECU controls the mechanical matrix cancel button.
  • the ECU can adjust the height of each support rod in the area indicated by the second position information in the mechanical matrix according to the button cancellation command.
  • the button elimination command can instruct the ECU to adjust each support rod in the first area to the same height, so that the height of the support rods in the first area is the same, that is, to restore the level in the first area.
  • Fig. 21 is a schematic structural diagram of a vehicle-mounted system provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the vehicle-mounted system 2400 includes a mechanical matrix 100, a surface control unit 2401, an ECU 2402, a CDC 2403, a pose detection module 2404, a camera 2405, and a VDC 2406.
  • a surface control unit 2401, ECU 2402, CDC 2403, pose detection module 2404, and VDC 2406 can be integrated in one device, or the surface control unit 2401, ECU 2402, CDC 2403, pose detection Module 2404 and VDC 2406 can be independent devices.
  • the mechanical matrix 100 includes multiple motion units, and the height of the top of each motion unit is adjustable.
  • Each motion unit 110 is provided with a sensor. Specifically, reference may be made to the description of FIG. 1 .
  • the surface control unit 2401 can receive the contact information sent by each sensor in the mechanical matrix 100 , the contact information is used to indicate whether the motion unit where the sensor is set is in contact with the target. Therefore, the surface control unit 2401 can determine the adjustment mode of each motion unit in the mechanical matrix 100 according to the contact information.
  • the adjustment method of the exercise unit may include the adjusted height of the exercise unit, the movement speed during the adjustment, and the like.
  • the surface control unit 2401 can also send control information to the ECU 2402, and the control information is used to indicate the adjustment mode of each movement unit in the mechanical matrix 100.
  • the ECU 2402 can receive the control information sent by the surface control unit 2401, and according to the control information, control each movement unit in the mechanical matrix 100 to adjust according to the adjustment mode indicated by the control information. Through ECU 2402's control of each movement unit in the mechanical matrix, the adjustment of the three-dimensional image formed by the mechanical matrix can be realized.
  • the surface control unit 2401 may determine whether the target is an electronic display device according to the contact information sent by each sensor.
  • the surface control unit 2401 may determine an adjustment method so that the target is located in the concave structure formed by each moving unit of the mechanical matrix.
  • the surface control unit 2401 may send a detection request to the CDC 2403.
  • CDC 2403 may forward the detection request to pose detection module 2404.
  • the pose detection module 2404 may reside in the DMS.
  • the pose detection module 2404 can process the image collected by the camera 2405 according to the detection request, so as to determine the pose of the driver's head.
  • the pose detection module 2404 can also send the driver's head pose to the CDC 2403.
  • the CDC 2403 can also determine the target position and target posture according to the driver's head posture, and send the target position and target posture to the surface control unit 2401.
  • the target attitude orients the electronic display device toward the driver.
  • the surface control unit 2401 can determine the adjustment mode of each motion unit in the mechanical matrix 100 according to the target position and target posture. This adjustment method makes the target at the target position and the target attitude in the adjusted mechanical matrix.
  • the in-vehicle system 2400 may cause the electronic display device to face the driver.
  • the VDC 2406 can send bumpy information to the CDC 2403.
  • the bump information is used to indicate the vibration direction and distance of the vehicle vibration.
  • the CDC 2403 can determine buffer information according to the jolt information, and send the buffer amount to the surface control unit 2401.
  • the buffer information may include adjusting direction and adjusting height difference.
  • the adjustment direction is opposite to the vibration direction, and the adjustment height difference is positively related to the vibration distance.
  • the surface control unit 2401 may determine an adjustment method according to the buffer information, so that each movement unit of the mechanical matrix is adjusted according to the buffer information.
  • CDC 2403 can also store the target position of the electronic display device determined each time and the number of times each target position is determined. In situations such as failing to acquire the driver's head posture, the CDC 2403 can send the target position with the highest number of records to the surface control unit 2401. Of course, the CDC 2403 can also record the target attitude determined each time and the number of times the target attitude is determined. When the head posture of the driver cannot be obtained, the CDC 2403 can also send the most recorded target posture to the surface control unit 2401.
  • the CDC 2403 can send the stereoscopic image information to the surface control unit 2401.
  • the surface control unit 2401 may determine an adjustment mode corresponding to the stereoscopic image information, so that the mechanical matrix displays the stereoscopic image indicated by the stereoscopic image information.
  • Fig. 22 is a schematic structural diagram of a mechanical matrix control device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the mechanical matrix includes multiple motion units, each of which is provided with a sensor.
  • the control device 2000 of the mechanical matrix includes an acquisition module 2010 and an adjustment module 2020 .
  • the acquiring module 2010 is configured to acquire the contact information output by the sensors provided on the plurality of motion units, the contact information is used to indicate whether the tip of the motion unit is in contact with the target.
  • the adjustment module 2020 is configured to adjust the height of the top of at least one of the motion units according to the contact information, the at least one motion unit includes a contact motion unit and/or an adjacent motion unit, the top of the contact motion unit is in contact with the The target is in contact, and the distance between the adjacent motion unit and the contacting motion unit is smaller than a preset value.
  • the height of the top of the at least one motion unit is adjusted so that the first motion unit and the second motion unit form a concave structure, and the height of the top of the first motion unit is smaller than that of the second motion unit.
  • the height of the top of the unit, the second movement unit surrounds the first movement unit, and in the adjusted mechanical array, the first movement unit includes the contact movement unit.
  • the first motion unit is the contact motion unit
  • the second motion unit includes the adjacent motion unit
  • the mechanical matrix is located in a vehicle.
  • the obtaining module 2010 is further configured to obtain bump information, the bump information is used to indicate the vibration direction and vibration distance of the vehicle vibration, and the vibration direction is a direction perpendicular to the sea level.
  • the apparatus 2000 also includes a processing module.
  • the processing module is used to determine the adjusted height difference according to the turbulence information, and the adjusted height difference is positively correlated with the shaking distance.
  • the adjustment module 2020 is also used to adjust the height of the top of the contact motion unit in a direction opposite to the vibration direction, and the height change of the contact motion unit is the adjusted height difference
  • the mechanical matrix is located in a vehicle.
  • the control device further includes a processing module configured to determine that the vehicle is in a bumpy state.
  • the adjustment module 2020 is further configured to, according to the first contact information output by the first sensor, adjust the height of the top of the contact motion unit so as to minimize the difference between the first pressure and the second pressure, the first contact information Used to indicate the first pressure, the first pressure is the pressure on the contact motion unit when the vehicle is in the bumpy state, and the second pressure is the pressure when the vehicle is in a smooth running state The pressure on the contact motion unit.
  • the contact motion unit forms a bracket, and the bracket is used to set the orientation of the target.
  • control device 2000 further includes a processing module, the processing module is configured to, according to the contact information, determine that the target is an electronic display device.
  • the obtaining module 2010 is further configured to obtain head position information, the head position information is used to indicate the position of the user's head, and the bracket makes the target face the user's head department.
  • the acquiring module 2010 is further configured to acquire head posture information, where the head posture information is used to indicate the symmetry plane of the user's head.
  • the processing module is further configured to determine a target position according to the head posture information, and the target position is located on the symmetry plane.
  • the adjustment module 2020 is further configured to adjust the height of at least one of the moving units to form a slope, so that the target slides to the target position, and the support is located at the target position.
  • the head posture information is also used to indicate the direct-sight direction of the user, and the sliding and turning of the target on the slope makes the bottom of the target perpendicular to the direct-sight direction.
  • the support is formed such that the base is perpendicular to the plane of symmetry and the target is directed toward the user's head.
  • the mechanical array is used to display an image, and the plurality of motion units correspond to a plurality of pixels in the image.
  • the adjustment module 2020 is further configured to adjust the color of at least one pixel according to the contact information, and the at least one pixel is a pixel corresponding to at least one motion unit among the contact motion unit and the adjacent motion units.
  • Fig. 23 is a schematic structural diagram of a mechanical matrix control device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the mechanical matrix includes multiple motion units, each of which is provided with a sensor.
  • the sensor is used to output contact information, and the contact information is used to indicate whether the tip of the motion unit is in contact with the target.
  • the mechanical matrix control device 4000 includes an acquisition module 4010 , an adjustment module 4020 , and an output module 4030 .
  • the obtaining module 4010 is used to obtain button formation information.
  • the adjustment module 4020 is configured to adjust the height of at least one of the first and second motion units among the plurality of motion units according to the button formation information, so as to form a button, and the second The motion unit surrounds the first motion unit, and in the adjusted mechanical matrix, the height of the first motion unit located in the area where the button is located is different from the height of the second motion unit.
  • the output module 4030 is configured to output key information, the key information is determined according to the contact information output by the sensor provided on the first motion unit.
  • the acquiring module 4010 is also used to acquire button elimination information
  • the adjustment module 4020 is further configured to adjust the height of at least one of the first motion unit and the second motion unit according to the button elimination information, so as to eliminate the button.
  • Fig. 24 is a schematic structural diagram of a mechanical matrix control device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the control device 3000 of the mechanical matrix includes at least one memory 3010 and at least one processor 3020, the at least one memory 3010 is used to store a program, and the at least one processor 3020 is used to run the program, so as to realize the method described above .
  • the device 2000, the device 3000, and the device 4000 can be a vehicle with a storage and/or human-computer interaction function, or other components with a storage and/or human-computer interaction function.
  • the device includes but is not limited to: vehicle-mounted terminal, vehicle-mounted controller, vehicle-mounted module, vehicle-mounted module, vehicle-mounted component, vehicle-mounted chip, and vehicle-mounted unit. , a vehicle-mounted chip, and a vehicle-mounted unit, implementing the method provided by this application.
  • the device can also be an intelligent terminal with storage and/or human-computer interaction functions other than the vehicle, or be set in an intelligent terminal with storage and/or human-computer interaction functions other than the vehicle, or set in the Among the components of the smart terminal.
  • the smart terminal may be other terminal devices such as smart transportation devices, smart home devices, and robots.
  • the device includes, but is not limited to, a smart terminal or a controller, chip, sensor, and other components within the smart terminal.
  • the apparatus 2000 and the apparatus 3000 may be a general-purpose device or a special-purpose device.
  • the device can also be a desktop computer, a portable computer, a network server, a personal digital assistant (PDA), a mobile phone, a tablet computer, a wireless terminal device, an embedded device or other devices with processing functions.
  • PDA personal digital assistant
  • the embodiment of the present application does not limit the type of the device.
  • the apparatus 2000 and the apparatus 3000 may also be chips or processors with processing functions, and the apparatuses may include multiple processors.
  • the processor may be a single-core (single-CPU) processor or a multi-core (multi-CPU) processor.
  • the chip or processor with processing function may be set in the sensor, or may not be set in the sensor, but set at the receiving end of the output signal of the sensor.
  • the processor in the embodiment of the present application may be a central processing unit (central processing unit, CPU), and the processor may also be other general-purpose processors, digital signal processors (digital signal processor, DSP), application specific integrated circuits (application specific integrated circuit, ASIC), off-the-shelf programmable gate array (field programmable gate array, FPGA) or other programmable logic devices, discrete gate or transistor logic devices, discrete hardware components, etc.
  • a general-purpose processor may be a microprocessor, or the processor may be any conventional processor, or the like.
  • the memory in the embodiments of the present application may be a volatile memory or a nonvolatile memory, or may include both volatile and nonvolatile memories.
  • the non-volatile memory can be read-only memory (read-only memory, ROM), programmable read-only memory (programmable ROM, PROM), erasable programmable read-only memory (erasable PROM, EPROM), electrically programmable Erases programmable read-only memory (electrically EPROM, EEPROM) or flash memory.
  • Volatile memory can be random access memory (RAM), which acts as external cache memory.
  • RAM random access memory
  • static random access memory static random access memory
  • DRAM dynamic random access memory
  • DRAM synchronous dynamic random access memory Access memory
  • SDRAM synchronous dynamic random access memory
  • double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory double data rate SDRAM, DDR SDRAM
  • enhanced synchronous dynamic random access memory enhanced SDRAM, ESDRAM
  • serial link DRAM SLDRAM
  • direct memory bus random access memory direct rambus RAM, DR RAM
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a computer-readable storage medium, which is characterized in that the computer-readable storage medium has program instructions, and when the program instructions are directly or indirectly executed, the foregoing method is realized.
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a computer program product containing instructions, which, when run on a computing device, enables the computing device to execute the aforementioned method, or enables the computing device to realize the functions of the aforementioned apparatus.
  • An embodiment of the present application further provides a chip system, which is characterized in that the chip system includes at least one processor, and when the program instructions are executed in the at least one processor, the foregoing method is implemented.
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides an on-vehicle system, which is used to provide the control function of the mechanical matrix for the vehicle. It includes at least one control device of the mechanical matrix mentioned in the above-mentioned embodiments of the present application, and the mechanical matrix.
  • the at least one sensor device in the system can be integrated into a complete machine or equipment, or the at least one sensor device in the system can also be independently configured as a component or device.
  • An embodiment of the present application further provides a vehicle, the vehicle includes the mechanical matrix control device mentioned in at least one of the above-mentioned embodiments of the present application.
  • An embodiment of the present application further provides a terminal, including the mechanical matrix control device mentioned in at least one of the foregoing embodiments of the present application.
  • the terminal can be transportation equipment, such as cars, trucks, motorcycles, buses, boats, airplanes, helicopters, lawn mowers, recreational vehicles, playground vehicles, construction equipment, trams, golf carts, trains , trolleys, etc.
  • transportation equipment such as cars, trucks, motorcycles, buses, boats, airplanes, helicopters, lawn mowers, recreational vehicles, playground vehicles, construction equipment, trams, golf carts, trains , trolleys, etc.
  • the above-mentioned embodiments may be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, firmware or other arbitrary combinations.
  • the above-described embodiments may be implemented in whole or in part in the form of computer program products.
  • the computer program product comprises one or more computer instructions or computer programs.
  • the processes or functions according to the embodiments of the present application will be generated in whole or in part.
  • the computer may be a general purpose computer, a special purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable devices.
  • the computer instructions may be stored in or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium, for example, the computer instructions may be transmitted from a website, computer, server or data center Transmission to another website site, computer, server or data center by wired (such as infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.).
  • the computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer, or a data storage device such as a server or a data center that includes one or more sets of available media.
  • the available media may be magnetic media (eg, floppy disk, hard disk, magnetic tape), optical media (eg, DVD), or semiconductor media.
  • the semiconductor medium may be a solid state drive.
  • At least one means one or more, and “multiple” means two or more.
  • At least one of the following" or similar expressions refer to any combination of these items, including any combination of single or plural items.
  • at least one item (unit) in a, b or c can represent: a, b, c, a-b, a-c, b-c or a-b-c, wherein a, b, c can be single or multiple.
  • sequence numbers of the above-mentioned processes do not mean the order of execution, and the execution order of the processes should be determined by their functions and internal logic, and should not be used in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the implementation process constitutes any limitation.
  • a component may be, but is not limited to being, a process running on a processor, a processor, an object, an executable, a thread of execution, a program, and/or a computer.
  • an application running on a computing device and the computing device can be components.
  • One or more components can reside within a process and/or thread of execution and a component can be localized on one computer and/or distributed between two or more computers.
  • these components can execute from various computer readable media having various data structures stored thereon.
  • a component may, for example, be based on a signal having one or more packets of data (e.g., data from two components interacting with another component between a local system, a distributed system, and/or a network, such as the Internet via a signal interacting with other systems). Communicate through local and/or remote processes.
  • packets of data e.g., data from two components interacting with another component between a local system, a distributed system, and/or a network, such as the Internet via a signal interacting with other systems.
  • the disclosed systems, devices and methods may be implemented in other ways.
  • the device embodiments described above are only illustrative.
  • the division of the units is only a logical function division. In actual implementation, there may be other division methods.
  • multiple units or components can be combined or May be integrated into another system, or some features may be ignored, or not implemented.
  • the mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection shown or discussed may be through some interfaces, and the indirect coupling or communication connection of devices or units may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms.
  • the units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components displayed as units may or may not be physical units, that is, they may be located in one place, or may be distributed to multiple network units. Part or all of the units can be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of the solution of this embodiment.
  • each functional unit in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, each unit may exist separately physically, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
  • the functions described above are realized in the form of software function units and sold or used as independent products, they can be stored in a computer-readable storage medium.
  • the technical solution of the present application is essentially or the part that contributes to the prior art or the part of the technical solution can be embodied in the form of a software product, and the computer software product is stored in a storage medium, including Several instructions are used to make a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) execute all or part of the steps of the methods described in the various embodiments of the present application.
  • the aforementioned storage media include: U disk, mobile hard disk, read-only memory (Read-Only Memory, ROM), random access memory (Random Access Memory, RAM), magnetic disk or optical disc and other media that can store program codes. .

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • General Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Theoretical Computer Science (AREA)
  • Human Computer Interaction (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Mechanical Engineering (AREA)
  • User Interface Of Digital Computer (AREA)
  • Position Input By Displaying (AREA)

Abstract

The present application provides a mechanical matrix, and a control method and apparatus for a mechanical matrix. The mechanical matrix comprises motion units; the height of the top end of each motion unit is adjustable; a sensor is provided on each motion unit; and the sensor is used for outputting contact information, and the contact information is used for indicating whether the top end of the motion unit is in contact with a target. The sensor is provided on the motion unit, and the contact information outputted by the sensor is used for indicating whether the motion unit is in contact with the target, so that a three-dimensional shape formed by each motion unit in the mechanical matrix can be adjusted according to the situation that the motion unit is in contact with the target, thereby being capable of making the mechanical matrix have a human-computer interaction capability, and improving the flexibility of controlling the mechanical matrix.

Description

机械矩阵、机械矩阵的控制方法和装置Mechanical matrix, control method and device for mechanical matrix 技术领域technical field
本申请涉及机械结构领域,具体涉及机械矩阵、机械矩阵的控制方法和装置。The present application relates to the field of mechanical structures, in particular to a mechanical matrix and a control method and device for the mechanical matrix.
背景技术Background technique
机械矩阵包括多个矩阵单元,每个矩阵单元可沿直线双向运动,即每个矩阵单元的高度可调。该多个矩阵单元可以按行列有序排列。机械矩阵中,矩阵单元数量可根据实际应用环境进行定制。通过控制矩阵单元高度,可以构建各种静态和动态图案,以此模拟三维地形地貌、城市规划变迁、活字印刷、文字图案、波浪运动等。该装置还可与数字影像结合,形成各种逼真的三维动态图案。The mechanical matrix includes multiple matrix units, and each matrix unit can move bidirectionally along a straight line, that is, the height of each matrix unit is adjustable. The plurality of matrix units can be arranged in order in rows and columns. In the mechanical matrix, the number of matrix units can be customized according to the actual application environment. By controlling the height of the matrix units, various static and dynamic patterns can be constructed to simulate three-dimensional topography, urban planning changes, movable type printing, text patterns, wave movements, etc. The device can also be combined with digital images to form various realistic three-dimensional dynamic patterns.
机械矩阵形成的立体形状是预先设置的,调整方式的灵活性较低。The three-dimensional shape formed by the mechanical matrix is preset, and the flexibility of the adjustment method is low.
发明内容Contents of the invention
本申请提供一种机械矩阵、机械矩阵的控制方法和装置,能够提高机械矩阵的调整方式的灵活性。The present application provides a mechanical matrix, a control method and a device for the mechanical matrix, which can improve the flexibility of the adjustment mode of the mechanical matrix.
第一方面,提供了一种机械矩阵,包括多个运动单元;每个运动单元的顶端的高度可调;每个运动单元上设置有传感器,所述传感器用于输出接触信息,所述接触信息用于指示设置运动单元的顶端是否与目标接触。In the first aspect, a mechanical matrix is provided, including a plurality of motion units; the height of the top of each motion unit is adjustable; each motion unit is provided with a sensor, and the sensor is used to output contact information, and the contact information It is used to indicate whether the tip of the set motion unit is in contact with the target.
通过在运动单元上设置传感器,传感器输出的接触信息用于指示运动单元是否与目标接触。从而,可以使得机械矩阵具有人机交互的能力,并且可以根据感器输出的接触信息对机械矩阵进行控制,提高对机械矩阵的控制灵活性。By setting the sensor on the motion unit, the contact information output by the sensor is used to indicate whether the motion unit is in contact with the target. Therefore, the mechanical matrix can be provided with the ability of human-computer interaction, and the mechanical matrix can be controlled according to the contact information output by the sensor, and the control flexibility of the mechanical matrix can be improved.
结合第一方面,在一些可能的实现方式中,所述多个运动单元包括第一运动单元和第二运动单元,在根据所述接触信息调整后的所述机械阵列中,所述第一运动单元和所述第二运动单元形成凹陷结构,所述第一运动单元的顶端的高度小于所述第二运动单元的顶端的高度,所述第二运动单元环绕所述第一运动单元,所述第一运动单元包括所述多个运动单元中与所述目标接触的接触运动单元。With reference to the first aspect, in some possible implementation manners, the plurality of motion units include a first motion unit and a second motion unit, and in the mechanical array adjusted according to the contact information, the first motion unit The unit and the second movement unit form a concave structure, the height of the top of the first movement unit is smaller than the height of the top of the second movement unit, the second movement unit surrounds the first movement unit, the The first motion unit includes a contact motion unit that is in contact with the target among the plurality of motion units.
当目标与机械矩阵中运动单元的接触时,对运动单元的顶端的高度进行调整,使得在根据所述接触信息调整后的所述机械阵列中,形成凹陷结构,并使得目标位于该凹陷中。与形状固定的置物架相比,灵活的置物架形成方式,能够减小置物架对空间的占用。When the target is in contact with the moving unit in the mechanical matrix, the height of the top of the moving unit is adjusted, so that a concave structure is formed in the mechanical array adjusted according to the contact information, and the target is located in the concave. Compared with the shelf with a fixed shape, the flexible form of the shelf can reduce the space occupied by the shelf.
结合第一方面,在一些可能的实现方式中,所述第一运动单元为所述接触运动单元,所述第二运动单元包括所述多个运动单元中与所述接触运动单元距离小于预设值的邻近运动单元。With reference to the first aspect, in some possible implementation manners, the first motion unit is the contact motion unit, and the second motion unit is one of the plurality of motion units that is less than a preset distance from the contact motion unit Neighboring motion units of the value.
位于凹陷结构的底端的第一运动单元均与目标接触,使得凹陷结构的底部适应于目标的形状,为目标提供稳定的支撑,提高对放置物品的支撑稳定性。The first motion units located at the bottom of the concave structure are all in contact with the target, so that the bottom of the concave structure adapts to the shape of the target, provide stable support for the target, and improve the support stability for placed objects.
环绕凹陷结构的底端的第二运动单元与目标不接触,且第二运动单元与位于凹陷结构 底端的第一运动单元之间的距离小于或等于预设值,使得凹陷结构的形状和大小适应于目标的形状,提高机械矩阵对放置物品的支撑稳定性,避免目标晃动。The second motion unit surrounding the bottom of the concave structure is not in contact with the target, and the distance between the second motion unit and the first motion unit at the bottom of the concave structure is less than or equal to a preset value, so that the shape and size of the concave structure are adapted to The shape of the target improves the support stability of the mechanical matrix for placed items and prevents the target from shaking.
结合第一方面,在一些可能的实现方式中,所述机械矩阵位于车辆中,所述车辆处于颠簸状态,接触运动单元的高度的变化方向与所述车辆震动的震动方向相反,所述接触运动单元的高度变化量与所述车辆震动的震动距离正相关,所述接触运动单元是所述多个运动单元中与所述目标接触的运动单元。With reference to the first aspect, in some possible implementation manners, the mechanical matrix is located in a vehicle, and the vehicle is in a bumpy state, the direction of change of the height of the contact motion unit is opposite to the vibration direction of the vehicle vibration, and the contact motion unit The height variation of a unit is positively correlated with the vibration distance of the vehicle vibration, and the contact motion unit is a motion unit in contact with the target among the plurality of motion units.
结合第一方面,在一些可能的实现方式中,所述目标为电子显示设备,在根据所述接触信息调整后的所述机械阵列中,所述多个运动单元中与所述目标接触的接触运动单元形成支架,所述支架用于设置所述目标的朝向。With reference to the first aspect, in some possible implementations, the target is an electronic display device, and in the mechanical array adjusted according to the contact information, the contacts among the multiple motion units that are in contact with the target The motion unit forms a frame for setting the orientation of the target.
车辆颠簸的情况下,车辆与的绝对高度发生变化。根据颠簸信息,对接触运动单元的高度进行调整,使得接触运动单元的顶端与车辆发生相对运动。接触运动单元的顶端朝向与车辆的震动方向相反的方向运动,并且接触运动单元的高度变化差值与车辆的震动距离正相关。In the case of vehicle bumps, the absolute height of the vehicle changes. According to the jolt information, the height of the contact motion unit is adjusted so that the top of the contact motion unit moves relative to the vehicle. The tip of the contact motion unit moves in a direction opposite to the vibration direction of the vehicle, and the height change difference of the contact motion unit is positively correlated with the vibration distance of the vehicle.
也就是说,通过控制接触运动单元与车辆的发生相对运动,减小目标的绝对距离的变化幅度,减小目标受到的颠簸。That is to say, by controlling the relative movement between the contact motion unit and the vehicle, the change range of the absolute distance of the target is reduced, and the bumps suffered by the target are reduced.
结合第一方面,在一些可能的实现方式中,所述目标为电子显示设备,在根据所述接触信息调整后的所述机械阵列中,所述多个运动单元中与所述目标接触的接触运动单元形成支架,所述支架用于设置所述目标的朝向。With reference to the first aspect, in some possible implementations, the target is an electronic display device, and in the mechanical array adjusted according to the contact information, the contacts among the multiple motion units that are in contact with the target The motion unit forms a frame for setting the orientation of the target.
目标为电子显示设备,控制机械矩阵形成支架,对电子显示设备朝向进行调整,提高用户体验。The goal is electronic display equipment, control the mechanical matrix to form a bracket, adjust the orientation of electronic display equipment, and improve user experience.
结合第一方面,在一些可能的实现方式中,所述支架使得所述目标朝向使用者的头部。With reference to the first aspect, in some possible implementation manners, the bracket makes the target face the user's head.
机械矩阵中各个运动单元顶端形成的支架,使得电子线设备朝向使用者的头部,能够提高用户体验。The bracket formed on the top of each motion unit in the mechanical matrix makes the electronic wire device face the user's head, which can improve the user experience.
结合第一方面,在一些可能的实现方式中,至少一个所述运动单元的顶端形成的坡面,使得所述目标滑动至目标位置,所述目标位置位于所述使用者的头部的对称平面,所述支架位于所述目标位置。With reference to the first aspect, in some possible implementation manners, at least one slope surface is formed on the top of the motion unit, so that the target slides to a target position, and the target position is located at the symmetry plane of the user's head , the bracket is located at the target position.
将电子显示设备设置在头部的对称平面,可以使得使用者的双眼与电子显示设备的距离相等,提高用户体验。Setting the electronic display device on the symmetrical plane of the head can make the distance between the user's eyes and the electronic display device equal, thereby improving user experience.
结合第一方面,在一些可能的实现方式中,所述目标在所述坡面的滑动使得所述目标的底边与所述使用者的直视方向垂直,所述支架的形成使得所述底边与所述对称平面垂直,并使得所述目标朝向所述使用者的头部。With reference to the first aspect, in some possible implementation manners, the target slides on the slope so that the bottom of the target is perpendicular to the direct viewing direction of the user, and the support is formed such that the bottom A side is perpendicular to the plane of symmetry and directs the target towards the user's head.
使得目标的底边与使用者的直视方向垂直。从而,在形成支架时,在不改变目标的底边接触的运动单元的情况下,目标的姿态更符合使用者对电子显示设备的姿态要求,提高用户体验。Make the bottom edge of the target perpendicular to the user's direct view. Therefore, when the bracket is formed, without changing the motion unit in contact with the bottom edge of the target, the posture of the target is more in line with the posture requirements of the user for the electronic display device, thereby improving user experience.
结合第一方面,在一些可能的实现方式中,所述机械阵列用于显示图像,所述多个运动单元对应于所述图像的多个像素,在根据所述接触信息调整后的所述机械阵列中,至少一个所述像素的颜色改变,所述至少一个像素是接触运动单元、邻近运动单元中的至少一个运动单元对应的像素,所述接触运动单元是所述多个运动单元中与所述目标接触的运动单元,所述邻近运动单元是与所述接触运动单元距离小于预设值的运动单元。With reference to the first aspect, in some possible implementations, the mechanical array is used to display an image, the multiple motion units correspond to multiple pixels of the image, and the mechanical array adjusted according to the contact information In the array, the color of at least one pixel is changed, and the at least one pixel is a pixel corresponding to at least one of the contact motion unit and the adjacent motion unit, and the contact motion unit is the pixel corresponding to the plurality of motion units. A moving unit that is in contact with the target, and the adjacent moving unit is a moving unit whose distance from the contacting moving unit is smaller than a preset value.
在多个运动单元与机械阵列显示的图像中多个像素对应的情况下,还可以根据支撑结构输出的接触信息,调整各个像素的颜色,使得对机械矩阵的控制方式更为灵活。In the case that multiple motion units correspond to multiple pixels in the image displayed by the mechanical array, the color of each pixel can also be adjusted according to the contact information output by the support structure, making the control of the mechanical matrix more flexible.
第二方面,提供了一种机械矩阵的控制方法,其特征在于,所述机械矩阵包括多个运动单元,每个运动单元上设置有传感器,所述方法包括:获取所述多个运动单元上设置的传感器输出的接触信息,所述接触信息用于指示运动单元的顶端是否与目标接触;根据所述接触信息,调整至少一个所述运动单元的顶端的高度,所述至少一个运动单元包括接触运动单元和/或邻近运动单元,所述接触运动单元的顶端与所述目标接触,所述邻近运动单元与所述接触运动单元距离小于预设值。In a second aspect, a method for controlling a mechanical matrix is provided, wherein the mechanical matrix includes a plurality of motion units, each of which is provided with a sensor, and the method includes: acquiring Contact information output by the set sensor, the contact information is used to indicate whether the top of the motion unit is in contact with the target; according to the contact information, adjust the height of the top of at least one of the motion units, the at least one motion unit includes a contact A motion unit and/or an adjacent motion unit, the tip of the contact motion unit is in contact with the target, and the distance between the adjacent motion unit and the contact motion unit is less than a preset value.
通过在运动单元上设置传感器,传感器输出的接触信息用于指示运动单元的顶端是否与目标接触,在机械矩阵中存在顶端与与目标接触的接触运动单元的情况下,调整接触运动单元和接触运动单元附近的邻近运动单元中的至少一个运动单元的顶端的高度,以调整运动单元所形成的立体形状。从而,对于机械矩阵中各个运动单元形成的立体形状的调整方式更为灵活。By setting a sensor on the motion unit, the contact information output by the sensor is used to indicate whether the tip of the motion unit is in contact with the target, and if there is a contact motion unit with the tip in contact with the target in the mechanical matrix, adjust the contact motion unit and the contact motion The height of the tip of at least one of the adjacent motion units near the unit is used to adjust the three-dimensional shape formed by the motion unit. Therefore, the adjustment method for the three-dimensional shape formed by each motion unit in the mechanical matrix is more flexible.
结合第二方面,在一些可能的实现方式中,所述顶端的高度为绝对高度,所述多个运动单元包括第一运动单元和第二运动单元,对所述至少一个所述运动单元的顶端的高度的调整,使得所述第一运动单元和所述第二运动单元形成凹陷结构,所述第一运动单元的顶端的高度小于所述第二运动单元的顶端的高度,所述第二运动单元环绕在所述第一运动单元周围,所述第一运动单元包括所述接触运动单元。With reference to the second aspect, in some possible implementations, the height of the top is an absolute height, the plurality of motion units include a first motion unit and a second motion unit, and the top of the at least one motion unit The adjustment of the height makes the first motion unit and the second motion unit form a concave structure, the height of the top of the first motion unit is smaller than the height of the top of the second motion unit, and the second motion A unit surrounds the first motion unit, the first motion unit including the contact motion unit.
当目标与机械矩阵中运动单元的接触时,对运动单元的顶端的高度进行调整,形成凹陷结构,并使得目标位于该凹陷中。与形状固定的置物架相比,在运动单元与目标接触的情况下调整机械矩阵中运动单元顶端的高度以形成置物架,能够减小置物架对空间的占用。When the target is in contact with the motion unit in the mechanical matrix, the height of the top of the motion unit is adjusted to form a recessed structure, and the target is located in the recess. Compared with a shelf with a fixed shape, adjusting the height of the top of the motion unit in the mechanical matrix to form a shelf when the motion unit is in contact with the target can reduce the space occupied by the shelf.
结合第二方面,在一些可能的实现方式中,在调整后的所述机械矩阵中,所述第一运动单元为所述接触运动单元。With reference to the second aspect, in some possible implementation manners, in the adjusted mechanical matrix, the first motion unit is the contact motion unit.
位于凹陷结构的底端的第一运动单元均与目标接触,使得凹陷结构的底部适应于目标的形状,为目标提供稳定的支撑,提高对放置物品的支撑稳定性。The first motion units located at the bottom of the concave structure are all in contact with the target, so that the bottom of the concave structure adapts to the shape of the target, provide stable support for the target, and improve the support stability for placed objects.
结合第二方面,所述第二运动单元包括所述邻近运动单元。With reference to the second aspect, the second motion unit includes the adjacent motion unit.
环绕凹陷结构的底端的第二运动单元与目标不接触,且第二运动单元与位于凹陷结构底端的第一运动单元之间的距离小于或等于预设值,使得凹陷结构的形状和大小适应于目标的形状,提高机械矩阵对放置物品的支撑稳定性,避免目标晃动。The second motion unit surrounding the bottom of the concave structure is not in contact with the target, and the distance between the second motion unit and the first motion unit at the bottom of the concave structure is less than or equal to a preset value, so that the shape and size of the concave structure are adapted to The shape of the target improves the support stability of the mechanical matrix for placed items and prevents the target from shaking.
结合第二方面,在一些可能的实现方式中,所述机械矩阵位于车辆中,所述方法还包括:获取颠簸信息,所述颠簸信息用于指示所述车辆震动的震动方向和震动距离,所述震动方向为与海平面垂直的方向的方向,所述震动距离用于指示所述车辆沿所述震动方向的绝对高度变化;根据所述颠簸信息,确定调整高度差,所述调整高度差与所述震动距离正相关;所述根据所述接触信息,调整至少一个所述运动单元的顶端的高度,包括:沿与所述震动方向相反的方向,调整所述接触运动单元的顶端的高度,所述接触运动单元的高度变化量为所述调整高度差。With reference to the second aspect, in some possible implementations, the mechanical matrix is located in the vehicle, and the method further includes: acquiring bump information, the bump information is used to indicate the vibration direction and the vibration distance of the vehicle vibration, the The vibration direction is a direction perpendicular to the sea level, and the vibration distance is used to indicate the absolute height change of the vehicle along the vibration direction; according to the bump information, an adjusted height difference is determined, and the adjusted height difference is the same as The vibration distance is positively correlated; the adjusting the height of the top of at least one of the motion units according to the contact information includes: adjusting the height of the top of the contact motion unit in a direction opposite to the vibration direction, The height variation of the contact motion unit is the adjusted height difference.
车辆颠簸的情况下,车辆与的绝对高度发生变化。根据颠簸信息,对接触运动单元的高度进行调整,使得接触运动单元的顶端与车辆发生相对运动。接触运动单元的顶端朝向 与车辆的震动方向相反的方向运动,并且接触运动单元的高度变化差值与车辆的震动距离正相关。In the case of vehicle bumps, the absolute height of the vehicle changes. According to the jolt information, the height of the contact motion unit is adjusted so that the top of the contact motion unit moves relative to the vehicle. The top of the contact motion unit moves in the direction opposite to the vibration direction of the vehicle, and the height change difference of the contact motion unit is positively correlated with the vibration distance of the vehicle.
也就是说,通过控制接触运动单元与车辆的发生相对运动,减小目标的绝对距离的变化幅度,减小目标受到的颠簸。That is to say, by controlling the relative movement between the contact motion unit and the vehicle, the change range of the absolute distance of the target is reduced, and the bumps suffered by the target are reduced.
结合第二方面,在一些可能的实现方式中,所述机械矩阵位于车辆中,所述方法还包括:获取颠簸指示信息,所述颠簸指示信息用于指示所述车辆处于颠簸状态;所述根据所述接触信息,调整至少一个所述运动单元的顶端的高度,包括:根据所述颠簸指示信息,以及第一传感器输出的第一接触信息,调整所述接触运动单元的顶端的高度,以使得第一压力与第二压力之间的差异最小,所述第一传感器设置在所述接触运动单元的顶端,所述第一接触信息用于指示所述第一压力,所述第一压力为在所述车辆处于所述颠簸状态下所述接触运动单元受到的压力,所述第二压力为在所述车辆处于平稳行驶状态下所述接触运动单元受到的压力。With reference to the second aspect, in some possible implementation manners, the mechanical matrix is located in a vehicle, and the method further includes: acquiring bump indication information, where the bump indication information is used to indicate that the vehicle is in a bump state; The contact information, adjusting the height of the top of at least one of the motion units includes: adjusting the height of the top of the contact motion unit according to the bump indication information and the first contact information output by the first sensor, so that The difference between the first pressure and the second pressure is the smallest, the first sensor is arranged on the top of the contact motion unit, the first contact information is used to indicate the first pressure, and the first pressure is at the top of the contact motion unit. The pressure received by the contact motion unit when the vehicle is in the turbulent state, and the second pressure is the pressure received by the contact motion unit when the vehicle is in a smooth running state.
对机械矩阵中接触运动单元顶端高度控制,使得在车辆颠簸状态下和平稳行驶状态下接触运动单元受到的压力的差异最小,能够减小位于接触运动单元顶端的目标受到的颠簸。The height of the top of the contact motion unit in the mechanical matrix is controlled to minimize the difference in the pressure on the contact motion unit when the vehicle is in a bumpy state and in a smooth driving state, which can reduce the bumps on the target at the top of the contact motion unit.
结合第二方面,在一些可能的实现方式中,所述目标为电子显示设备,调整后的所述机械矩阵中,所述接触运动单元形成支架,所述支架用于设置所述目标的朝向。With reference to the second aspect, in some possible implementation manners, the target is an electronic display device, and in the adjusted mechanical matrix, the contact motion unit forms a bracket, and the bracket is used to set the orientation of the target.
目标为电子显示设备,控制机械矩阵形成支架,对电子显示设备朝向进行调整,提高用户体验。The goal is electronic display equipment, control the mechanical matrix to form a bracket, adjust the orientation of electronic display equipment, and improve user experience.
结合第二方面,在一些可能的实现方式中,所述方法还包括:根据所述接触信息,确定所述目标为电子显示设备。With reference to the second aspect, in some possible implementation manners, the method further includes: determining that the target is an electronic display device according to the contact information.
根据接触信息进行判断,提供了一种简便的方式对目标是否为电子显示设备的判断方式。Judging based on the contact information provides a convenient way to judge whether the target is an electronic display device.
结合第二方面,在一些可能的实现方式中,获取头部位置信息,所述头部位置信息用于指示所述使用者的头部的位置,所述支架使得所述目标朝向所述使用者的头部。With reference to the second aspect, in some possible implementation manners, head position information is acquired, the head position information is used to indicate the position of the user's head, and the bracket makes the target face the user head.
根据获取的头部位置信息,控制机械矩阵中运动单元的顶端的高度形成支架,形成的支架使得目标朝向所述使用者的头部,能够提高用户体验。According to the obtained head position information, the height of the top of the motion unit in the mechanical matrix is controlled to form a bracket. The formed bracket makes the target face the user's head, which can improve user experience.
机械矩阵可以位于车辆中,头部位置信息可以是根据车辆中的摄像头采集的图像确定的。The mechanical matrix may be located in the vehicle, and the head position information may be determined from images collected by cameras in the vehicle.
结合第二方面,在一些可能的实现方式中,获取头部姿态信息,所述头部姿态信息用于指示所述使用者的头部的对称平面;根据所述头部姿态信息,确定目标位置,所述目标位置位于所述对称平面;所述调整至少一个所述运动单元的顶端的高度,包括:调整至少一个所述运动单元的高度以形成坡面,使得所述目标滑动至所述目标位置,所述支架位于所述目标位置。With reference to the second aspect, in some possible implementation manners, acquire head posture information, the head posture information is used to indicate the symmetry plane of the user's head; determine the target position according to the head posture information , the position of the target is located on the plane of symmetry; the adjusting the height of the top of at least one of the motion units includes: adjusting the height of at least one of the motion units to form a slope, so that the target slides to the target position, the bracket is located at the target position.
将电子显示设备设置在头部的对称平面,可以使得使用者的双眼与电子显示设备的距离相等,提高用户体验。Setting the electronic display device on the symmetrical plane of the head can make the distance between the user's eyes and the electronic display device equal, thereby improving user experience.
结合第二方面,在一些可能的实现方式中,所述目标在所述坡面的滑动使得所述目标的底边与所述对称平面垂直;所述支架的形成使得所述目标绕所述底边转动,绕底边转动后的所述目标朝向所述使用者的头部。With reference to the second aspect, in some possible implementation manners, the target slides on the slope so that the bottom of the target is perpendicular to the symmetry plane; the support is formed so that the target wraps around the bottom While rotating, the target after rotating around the bottom faces the user's head.
使得目标的底边与使用者的直视方向垂直,从而,在形成支架时,在不改变目标的底边接触的运动单元的情况下,目标的姿态更符合使用者对电子显示设备的姿态要求,提高用户体验。Make the bottom edge of the target perpendicular to the direct viewing direction of the user, so that when forming the bracket, the posture of the target is more in line with the posture requirements of the user for the electronic display device without changing the motion unit that the bottom edge of the target contacts , improve user experience.
例如,可以在目标在所述坡面的滑动后,调整目标下方的运动单元的顶端的高度使得目标绕目标的显示平面上与底边垂直的方向转动,以使得目标的底边与对称平面垂直,也就是使得目标的底边与双眼的连线平行。之后,调整目标下方的运动单元的顶端的高度,以使得目标沿底边转动,以形成支架。For example, after the target slides on the slope, the height of the top of the motion unit below the target can be adjusted to make the target rotate around the direction perpendicular to the bottom edge on the display plane of the target, so that the bottom edge of the target is perpendicular to the symmetry plane , that is, make the bottom edge of the target parallel to the line connecting the eyes. Afterwards, the height of the top end of the motion unit below the target is adjusted so that the target turns along the bottom edge to form a stand.
结合第二方面,在一些可能的实现方式中,所述机械阵列用于显示图像,所述多个运动单元对应于所述图像的多个像素,所述方法还包括:根据所述接触信息,调整至少一个所述像素的颜色,所述至少一个像素是所述接触运动单元、所述邻近运动单元中的至少一个运动单元对应的像素。With reference to the second aspect, in some possible implementations, the mechanical array is used to display an image, and the multiple motion units correspond to multiple pixels of the image, and the method further includes: according to the contact information, Adjusting the color of at least one pixel, where the at least one pixel is a pixel corresponding to at least one of the contact motion unit and the adjacent motion unit.
在多个运动单元与机械阵列显示的图像中多个像素对应的情况下,还可以根据支撑结构输出的接触信息,调整各个像素的颜色,使得对机械矩阵的控制方式更为灵活。In the case that multiple motion units correspond to multiple pixels in the image displayed by the mechanical array, the color of each pixel can also be adjusted according to the contact information output by the support structure, making the control of the mechanical matrix more flexible.
第三方面,提供一种机械矩阵的控制方法,所述机械矩阵包括多个运动单元,每个所述运动单元上设置有传感器,所述传感器用于输出接触信息,所述接触信息用于指示设置所述传感器的所述运动单元的顶端是否与目标接触,所述方法包括:获取按钮形成信息;根据所述按钮形成信息,调整所述多个运动单元中的第一运动单元、第二运动单元中的至少一个所述运动单元的顶端的高度,以形成按钮,调整后的所述机械矩阵中,位于所述按钮所在区域的第一运动单元的顶端的高度与第二运动单元的顶端的高度不同,所述第二运动单元环绕所述第一运动单元;输出按键信息,所述按键信息是根据所述第一运动单元上设置的传感器输出的所述接触信息确定的。In the third aspect, a method for controlling a mechanical matrix is provided, the mechanical matrix includes a plurality of motion units, each of the motion units is provided with a sensor, and the sensor is used to output contact information, and the contact information is used to indicate Setting whether the top of the movement unit of the sensor is in contact with the target, the method includes: acquiring button formation information; adjusting the first movement unit and the second movement unit among the plurality of movement units according to the button formation information; The height of the top of at least one of the motion units in the units is used to form a button. In the adjusted mechanical matrix, the height of the top of the first motion unit located in the area where the button is located is the same as the height of the top of the second motion unit. The heights are different, the second motion unit surrounds the first motion unit; output key information, the key information is determined according to the contact information output by the sensor provided on the first motion unit.
可以仅在对按钮有需求的情况下,控制机械矩阵形成按钮,并根据机械矩阵中各个运动单元上设置的传感器输出的接触信息,确定按键信息,从而可以实现机械矩阵的人机交互功能,提高机械矩阵应用的广泛性。The mechanical matrix can be controlled to form a button only when there is a need for the button, and the button information can be determined according to the contact information output by the sensor set on each motion unit in the mechanical matrix, so that the human-computer interaction function of the mechanical matrix can be realized and improved. Wide range of mechanical matrix applications.
结合第三方面,在一些可能的实现方式中,所述方法还包括:获取按钮消除信息;根据所述按钮消除信息,调整所述第一运动单元、所述第二运动单元中的至少一个所述运动单元的顶端的高度,以消除所述按钮。With reference to the third aspect, in some possible implementation manners, the method further includes: acquiring button elimination information; and adjusting at least one of the first movement unit and the second movement unit according to the button elimination information. The height of the top of the motion unit to eliminate the button.
在无需用户输入的情况下可以消除按钮,从而减小按钮对空间的占用。Buttons can be eliminated without requiring user input, thereby reducing the space occupied by buttons.
第四方面,提供一种机械矩阵的控制装置,所述机械矩阵包括多个运动单元,每个运动单元上设置有传感器,所述控制装置包括:获取模块,用于获取所述多个运动单元上设置的传感器输出的接触信息,所述接触信息用于指示运动单元的顶端是否与目标接触;调整模块,用于根据所述接触信息,调整至少一个所述运动单元的顶端的高度,所述至少一个运动单元包括接触运动单元和/或邻近运动单元,所述接触运动单元的顶端与所述目标接触,所述邻近运动单元与所述接触运动单元距离小于预设值。In a fourth aspect, there is provided a control device for a mechanical matrix, the mechanical matrix includes a plurality of motion units, each motion unit is provided with a sensor, and the control device includes: an acquisition module, configured to acquire the plurality of motion units The contact information output by the sensor provided above is used to indicate whether the top of the motion unit is in contact with the target; the adjustment module is used to adjust the height of at least one top of the motion unit according to the contact information, and the At least one motion unit includes a contact motion unit and/or an adjacent motion unit, the tip of the contact motion unit is in contact with the target, and the distance between the adjacent motion unit and the contact motion unit is less than a preset value.
结合第四方面,在一些可能的实现方式中,所述顶端的高度为绝对高度,所述多个运动单元包括第一运动单元和第二运动单元,对所述至少一个所述运动单元的顶端的高度的调整,使得所述第一运动单元和所述第二运动单元形成凹陷结构,所述第一运动单元的顶端的高度小于所述第二运动单元的顶端的高度,所述第二运动单元环绕在所述第一运动单元周围,在调整后的所述机械阵列中,所述第一运动单元包括所述接触运动单元。With reference to the fourth aspect, in some possible implementation manners, the height of the top is an absolute height, the plurality of motion units include a first motion unit and a second motion unit, and the top of the at least one motion unit The adjustment of the height makes the first motion unit and the second motion unit form a concave structure, the height of the top of the first motion unit is smaller than the height of the top of the second motion unit, and the second motion The unit surrounds the first movement unit, and in the adjusted mechanical array, the first movement unit includes the contact movement unit.
结合第四方面,在一些可能的实现方式中,调整后的所述机械矩阵中,所述第一运动单元为所述接触运动单元。With reference to the fourth aspect, in some possible implementation manners, in the adjusted mechanical matrix, the first motion unit is the contact motion unit.
结合第四方面,在一些可能的实现方式中,所述第二运动单元包括所述邻近运动单元。With reference to the fourth aspect, in some possible implementation manners, the second motion unit includes the adjacent motion unit.
结合第四方面,在一些可能的实现方式中,所述机械矩阵位于车辆中,所述获取模块还用于,获取颠簸信息,所述颠簸信息用于指示所述车辆震动的震动方向和震动距离,所述震动方向为与海平面垂直的方向的方向,所述震动距离用于指示所述车辆沿所述震动方向的绝对高度变化量;所述控制装置还包括处理模块,用于根据所述颠簸信息,确定调整高度差,所述调整高度差与所述震动距离正相关;所述调整模块还用于,沿与所述震动方向相反的方向,调整所述接触运动单元的顶端的高度,所述接触运动单元的高度变化量为所述调整高度差。With reference to the fourth aspect, in some possible implementation manners, the mechanical matrix is located in the vehicle, and the acquiring module is further configured to acquire bump information, where the bump information is used to indicate the vibration direction and vibration distance of the vehicle vibration , the vibration direction is a direction perpendicular to the sea level, the vibration distance is used to indicate the absolute height change of the vehicle along the vibration direction; the control device also includes a processing module for The jolt information is used to determine the adjusted height difference, and the adjusted height difference is positively correlated with the vibration distance; the adjustment module is also used to adjust the height of the top end of the contact motion unit in a direction opposite to the vibration direction, The height variation of the contact motion unit is the adjusted height difference.
结合第四方面,在一些可能的实现方式中,所述机械矩阵位于车辆中,所述控制装置还包括处理模块,所述处理模块用于确定所述车辆处于颠簸状态;所述调整模块还用于,根据第一传感器输出的第一接触信息,调整所述接触运动单元的顶端的高度,以使得第一压力与第二压力之间的差异最小,所述第一接触信息用于指示所述第一压力,所述第一压力为在所述车辆处于所述颠簸状态下所述接触运动单元受到的压力,所述第二压力为所述车辆处于平稳行驶状态下所述接触运动单元受到的压力。With reference to the fourth aspect, in some possible implementations, the mechanical matrix is located in the vehicle, and the control device further includes a processing module, the processing module is used to determine that the vehicle is in a bumpy state; the adjustment module also uses Therefore, according to the first contact information output by the first sensor, the height of the tip of the contact motion unit is adjusted to minimize the difference between the first pressure and the second pressure, the first contact information is used to indicate the A first pressure, where the first pressure is the pressure that the contact motion unit receives when the vehicle is in the bumpy state, and the second pressure is the pressure that the contact motion unit receives when the vehicle is in a smooth running state pressure.
结合第四方面,在一些可能的实现方式中,所述目标是否为电子显示设备,调整后的所述机械矩阵中,所述接触运动单元形成支架,所述支架用于设置所述目标的朝向。With reference to the fourth aspect, in some possible implementations, whether the target is an electronic display device or not, in the adjusted mechanical matrix, the contact motion unit forms a bracket, and the bracket is used to set the orientation of the target .
结合第四方面,在一些可能的实现方式中,所述控制装置还包括处理模块,所述处理模块用于,根据所述接触信息,确定所述目标为电子显示设备。With reference to the fourth aspect, in some possible implementation manners, the control device further includes a processing module, configured to determine, according to the contact information, that the target is an electronic display device.
结合第四方面,在一些可能的实现方式中,所述获取模块还用于,获取头部位置信息,所述头部位置信息用于指示所述使用者的头部的位置,所述支架使得所述目标朝向所述使用者的头部。With reference to the fourth aspect, in some possible implementation manners, the acquiring module is further configured to acquire head position information, the head position information is used to indicate the position of the user's head, and the bracket enables The target is directed toward the user's head.
结合第四方面,在一些可能的实现方式中,所述获取模块还用于,获取头部姿态信息,所述头部姿态信息用于指示所述使用者的头部的对称平面;所述处理模块还用于,根据所述头部姿态信息,确定目标位置,所述目标位置位于所述对称平面;所述调整模块还用于,调整至少一个所述运动单元的高度以形成坡面,使得所述目标滑动至所述目标位置,所述支架位于所述目标位置。With reference to the fourth aspect, in some possible implementation manners, the acquisition module is further configured to acquire head posture information, where the head posture information is used to indicate the symmetry plane of the user's head; the processing The module is also used to determine a target position according to the head posture information, and the target position is located on the symmetry plane; the adjustment module is also used to adjust the height of at least one of the motion units to form a slope, so that The target slides to the target position, and the bracket is located at the target position.
结合第四方面,在一些可能的实现方式中,所述头部姿态信息还用于指示所述使用者的直视方向,所述目标在所述坡面的滑动转动使得所述目标的底边与所述直视方向垂直;所述支架的形成使得所述底边与所述对称平面垂直,并使得所述目标朝向所述使用者的头部。With reference to the fourth aspect, in some possible implementation manners, the head posture information is also used to indicate the user's direct gaze direction, and the sliding and turning of the target on the slope makes the bottom edge of the target perpendicular to the direct viewing direction; the bracket is formed such that the bottom edge is perpendicular to the plane of symmetry and the target faces the user's head.
结合第四方面,在一些可能的实现方式中,所述机械阵列用于显示图像,所述多个运动单元对应于所述图像中的多个像素,所述调整模块还用于,根据所述接触信息,调整至少一个所述像素的颜色,所述至少一个像素是所述接触运动单元、所述邻近运动单元中的至少一个运动单元对应的像素。With reference to the fourth aspect, in some possible implementations, the mechanical array is used to display an image, the multiple motion units correspond to multiple pixels in the image, and the adjustment module is further configured to, according to the The contact information is to adjust the color of at least one pixel, and the at least one pixel is a pixel corresponding to at least one of the contact motion unit and the adjacent motion unit.
第五方面,提供一种机械矩阵的控制装置,所述机械矩阵包括多个运动单元,每个所述运动单元上设置有传感器,所述传感器用于输出接触信息,所述接触信息用于指示运动单元的顶端是否与目标接触,所述控制装置包括:获取模块,用于获取按钮形成信息;调 整模块,用于根据所述按钮形成信息,调整所述多个运动单元中的第一运动单元、第二运动单元中的至少一个所述运动单元的顶端的高度,以形成按钮,所述第二运动单元环绕所述第一运动单元,调整后的所述机械矩阵中,所述第一运动单元的顶端的高度与所述第二运动单元的顶端的高度不同;输出模块,用于输出按键信息,所述按键信息是根据所述第一运动单元上设置的传感器输出的所述接触信息确定的。In a fifth aspect, a control device for a mechanical matrix is provided, the mechanical matrix includes a plurality of motion units, each of the motion units is provided with a sensor, the sensor is used to output contact information, and the contact information is used to indicate Whether the top of the motion unit is in contact with the target, the control device includes: an acquisition module, configured to acquire button formation information; an adjustment module, configured to adjust the first motion unit among the plurality of motion units according to the button formation information , the height of the top of at least one of the second motion units to form a button, the second motion unit surrounds the first motion unit, and in the adjusted mechanical matrix, the first motion The height of the top of the unit is different from the height of the top of the second motion unit; the output module is used to output key information, and the key information is determined according to the contact information output by the sensor provided on the first motion unit of.
结合第五方面,在一些可能的实现方式中,所述获取模块还用于,获取按钮消除信息;所述调整模块还用于,根据所述按钮消除信息,调整所述第一运动单元、所述第二运动单元中的至少一个所述运动单元的顶端的高度,以消除所述按钮。With reference to the fifth aspect, in some possible implementation manners, the acquiring module is further configured to acquire button elimination information; the adjusting module is further configured to adjust the first motion unit, the The height of the top of at least one of the second motion units is adjusted to eliminate the button.
第六方面,提供了一种电子装置,包括至少一个存储器和至少一个处理器,所述至少一个存储器用于存储程序,所述至少一个处理器用于运行所述程序,以实现第一方面所述的方法。In a sixth aspect, an electronic device is provided, including at least one memory and at least one processor, the at least one memory is used to store a program, and the at least one processor is used to run the program, so as to implement the first aspect. Methods.
第七方面,提供一种芯片,其特征在于,包括至少一个处理器和接口电路,所述接口电路用于为所述至少一个处理器提供程序指令或者数据,所述至少一个处理器用于执行所述程序指令,以实现第一方面所述的方法。In a seventh aspect, there is provided a chip, which is characterized in that it includes at least one processor and an interface circuit, the interface circuit is used to provide program instructions or data for the at least one processor, and the at least one processor is used to execute the The above program instructions are used to implement the method described in the first aspect.
第八方面,提供一种计算机可读存储介质,其特征在于,所述计算机可读介质存储用于设备执行的程序代码,该程序代码被所述设备执行时,实现第一方面所述的方法。According to an eighth aspect, a computer-readable storage medium is provided, wherein the computer-readable medium stores program code for execution by a device, and when the program code is executed by the device, the method described in the first aspect is implemented .
第九方面,提供一种计算机程序产品,所述计算机程序产品包括计算机程序,当所述计算机程序产品被计算机执行时,该计算机执行前述第一方面中的方法。In a ninth aspect, a computer program product is provided, the computer program product includes a computer program, and when the computer program product is executed by a computer, the computer executes the method in the aforementioned first aspect.
应理解,本申请中,第一方面的方法具体可以是指第一方面以及第一方面中各种实现方式中的任意一种实现方式中的方法。It should be understood that in this application, the method in the first aspect may specifically refer to the first aspect and the method in any of the various implementation manners in the first aspect.
第十方面,提供一种终端,包括第一方面的机械矩阵,以及第四方面所述的机械矩阵的控制装置、第五方面所述的机械矩阵的控制装置或第六方面所述的电子装置。A tenth aspect provides a terminal, including the mechanical matrix of the first aspect, and the control device of the mechanical matrix of the fourth aspect, the control device of the mechanical matrix of the fifth aspect, or the electronic device of the sixth aspect .
进一步,该终端可以为运输设备,例如可以是轿车、卡车、摩托车、公共汽车、船、飞机、直升飞机、割草机、娱乐车、游乐场车辆、施工设备、电车、高尔夫球车、火车、手推车等。Further, the terminal can be transportation equipment, such as cars, trucks, motorcycles, buses, boats, airplanes, helicopters, lawn mowers, recreational vehicles, playground vehicles, construction equipment, trams, golf carts, Trains, trolleys, etc.
附图说明Description of drawings
图1是本申请实施例提供的一种机械矩阵的示意性结构图。Fig. 1 is a schematic structural diagram of a mechanical matrix provided by an embodiment of the present application.
图2是本申请实施例提供的一种机械矩阵的控制方法的示意性流程图。Fig. 2 is a schematic flowchart of a method for controlling a mechanical matrix provided by an embodiment of the present application.
图3是本申请实施例提供的另一种机械矩阵的控制方法的示意性流程图。Fig. 3 is a schematic flowchart of another method for controlling a mechanical matrix provided by an embodiment of the present application.
图4是本申请实施例提供的一种电子显示设备判断方法的示意性流程图。Fig. 4 is a schematic flowchart of a method for determining an electronic display device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
图5是本申请实施例提供的一种机械矩阵的示意性结构图。Fig. 5 is a schematic structural diagram of a mechanical matrix provided by an embodiment of the present application.
图6是本申请实施例提供的另一种机械矩阵的示意性结构图。Fig. 6 is a schematic structural diagram of another mechanical matrix provided by an embodiment of the present application.
图7是本申请实施例提供的又一种机械矩阵的示意性结构图。Fig. 7 is a schematic structural diagram of another mechanical matrix provided by the embodiment of the present application.
图8是本申请实施例提供的又一种机械矩阵的控制方法的示意性流程图。Fig. 8 is a schematic flowchart of another method for controlling a mechanical matrix provided by an embodiment of the present application.
图9至图13是本申请实施例提供的机械矩阵的示意性结构图。9 to 13 are schematic structural diagrams of the mechanical matrix provided by the embodiment of the present application.
图14是本申请实施例提供的又一种机械矩阵的控制方法的示意性流程图。Fig. 14 is a schematic flowchart of another method for controlling a mechanical matrix provided by an embodiment of the present application.
图15是本申请实施例提供的机械矩阵的示意性结构图。Fig. 15 is a schematic structural diagram of a mechanical matrix provided by an embodiment of the present application.
图16是本申请实施例提供的又一种机械矩阵的控制方法的示意性流程图。Fig. 16 is a schematic flowchart of another method for controlling a mechanical matrix provided by an embodiment of the present application.
图17是本申请实施例提供的机械矩阵的示意性结构图。Fig. 17 is a schematic structural diagram of a mechanical matrix provided by an embodiment of the present application.
图18是本申请实施例提供的又一种机械矩阵的控制方法的示意性流程图。Fig. 18 is a schematic flowchart of another method for controlling a mechanical matrix provided by an embodiment of the present application.
图19是本申请实施例提供的又一种机械矩阵的控制方法的示意性流程图。Fig. 19 is a schematic flowchart of another method for controlling a mechanical matrix provided by an embodiment of the present application.
图20是本申请实施例提供的又一种机械矩阵的控制方法的示意性流程图。Fig. 20 is a schematic flowchart of another method for controlling a mechanical matrix provided by an embodiment of the present application.
图21是本申请实施例提供的一种车载系统的示意性结构图。Fig. 21 is a schematic structural diagram of a vehicle-mounted system provided by an embodiment of the present application.
图22是本申请实施例提供的一种机械矩阵的控制装置的示意性结构图。Fig. 22 is a schematic structural diagram of a mechanical matrix control device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
图23是本申请实施例提供的另一种机械矩阵的控制装置的示意性结构图。Fig. 23 is a schematic structural diagram of another mechanical matrix control device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
图24是本申请实施例提供的又一种机械矩阵的控制装置的示意性结构图。Fig. 24 is a schematic structural diagram of another mechanical matrix control device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
具体实施方式detailed description
下面将结合附图,对本申请中的技术方案进行描述。The technical solution in this application will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings.
机械矩阵包括多个矩阵单元,每个矩阵单元可沿直线双向运动,即每个矩阵单元的高度可调。机械矩阵可以用于显示文字、图形、变幻动画等。通过控制机械矩阵中各个矩阵单元的高低,可以实现各种立体的图形效果的变幻。机械矩阵的控制与灯光音响媒体的配合,给观众带来影音和视觉的良好体验。The mechanical matrix includes multiple matrix units, and each matrix unit can move bidirectionally along a straight line, that is, the height of each matrix unit is adjustable. The mechanical matrix can be used to display text, graphics, changing animations, etc. By controlling the height of each matrix unit in the mechanical matrix, various three-dimensional graphic effects can be changed. The control of the mechanical matrix and the cooperation of the lighting and audio media bring the audience a good audio-visual and visual experience.
机械矩阵形成的立体形状是预先设置的,对立体形状的调整方式的灵活性较低。The three-dimensional shape formed by the mechanical matrix is preset, and the adjustment method of the three-dimensional shape has low flexibility.
为了解决上述问题,本申请实施例提供了一种机械矩阵,以及该机械矩阵的控制方法和装置。In order to solve the above problems, embodiments of the present application provide a mechanical matrix, and a control method and device for the mechanical matrix.
图1是本申请实施例提供的一种机械矩阵的示意性结构图。Fig. 1 is a schematic structural diagram of a mechanical matrix provided by an embodiment of the present application.
机械矩阵100包括多个运动单元110,每个运动单元110的顶端的高度可调。The mechanical matrix 100 includes a plurality of motion units 110 , and the height of the top of each motion unit 110 is adjustable.
运动单元110的顶端的高度,可以用于指示运动单元110的顶端与基准平面之间的距离。该基准平面可以是水平面,也可以与水平面具有一定夹角。The height of the top of the motion unit 110 may be used to indicate the distance between the top of the motion unit 110 and the reference plane. The reference plane may be a horizontal plane, or may have a certain angle with the horizontal plane.
每个运动单元110上设置有传感器120,传感器120用于输出接触信息。接触信息用于指示运动单元110的顶端是否与目标接触。Each motion unit 110 is provided with a sensor 120 for outputting contact information. The contact information is used to indicate whether the tip of the motion unit 110 is in contact with the target.
应当理解,每个传感器输出的接触信息用于指示设置该传感器的运动单元的顶端是否与目标接触。It should be understood that the contact information output by each sensor is used to indicate whether the tip of the motion unit on which the sensor is disposed is in contact with the target.
通过在每个运动单元上设置传感器,传感器输出的接触信息可以指示设置该传感器的运动单元的顶端是否与目标接触,从而使得对机械矩阵形成的立体形状的控制更加灵活。By installing a sensor on each motion unit, the contact information output by the sensor can indicate whether the tip of the motion unit on which the sensor is installed is in contact with the target, thus making the control of the three-dimensional shape formed by the mechanical matrix more flexible.
传感器可以持续输出接触信息,通过不同的信息内容指示运动单元的顶端是否与目标接触。或者,传感器可以仅在运动单元的顶端与目标接触情况下输出接触信息。或者,传感器可以仅在运动单元的顶端不与目标接触情况下输出接触信息。The sensor can continuously output contact information, indicating whether the tip of the motion unit is in contact with the target through different information contents. Alternatively, the sensor may output contact information only if the tip of the motion unit is in contact with the target. Alternatively, the sensor may output contact information only if the tip of the motion unit is not in contact with the target.
可以根据各个运动单元110的顶端与目标的接触情况,调整运动单元110的顶端的高度,使得机械矩阵形成的立体形状随着与目标的接触情况发生变化。The height of the top of each movement unit 110 can be adjusted according to the contact condition between the top of each movement unit 110 and the target, so that the three-dimensional shape formed by the mechanical matrix changes according to the contact condition with the target.
也可以在需要用户输入信息的情况下,调整运动单元110的顶端的高度,以使得机械矩阵形成的立体形状符合人体工程学的要求,处理好人-机-环境的协调关系,提高用户满意度。It is also possible to adjust the height of the top of the motion unit 110 when the user needs to input information, so that the three-dimensional shape formed by the mechanical matrix meets the requirements of ergonomics, handles the coordination relationship between man-machine-environment, and improves user satisfaction.
机械结构中,各个运动单元可以是具有固定形状的结构,也可以是形状可调的结构。In the mechanical structure, each motion unit can be a structure with a fixed shape, or a structure with an adjustable shape.
例如,运动单元的形状可以是柱状或类似柱状,运动单元可以沿柱状的纵向运动,从而使得运动单元的顶端的高度可调。或者,运动单元可以是可伸缩结构,运动单元的底端 可以固定,可以通过运动单元的伸缩,实现对运动单元的顶端的高度调整。For example, the shape of the motion unit may be columnar or similar to a column, and the motion unit may move along the longitudinal direction of the column, so that the height of the top of the motion unit can be adjusted. Or, the motion unit can be a telescopic structure, the bottom end of the motion unit can be fixed, and the height adjustment to the top of the motion unit can be realized through the expansion and contraction of the motion unit.
传感器120可以是压力传感器、光学传感器等。The sensor 120 may be a pressure sensor, an optical sensor, or the like.
压力传感器可以设置在运动单元110的顶端或底端。压力传感器输出的接触信息可以用于指示压力的大小。如果压力传感器输出的接触信息指示的压力大于或等于预设值,则可以确定设置该传感器的运动单元与目标接触;反之,如果压力传感器输出的接触信息指示的压力小于预设值,则可以确定设置该传感器的运动单元未与目标接触。The pressure sensor may be disposed at the top or bottom of the motion unit 110 . The contact information output by the pressure sensor can be used to indicate the magnitude of the pressure. If the pressure indicated by the contact information output by the pressure sensor is greater than or equal to the preset value, it can be determined that the motion unit setting the sensor is in contact with the target; conversely, if the pressure indicated by the contact information output by the pressure sensor is less than the preset value, it can be determined The motion unit on which this sensor is set is not in contact with the target.
光学传感器可以设置在运动单元110的顶端。光学传感器输出的接触信息可以用于指示光强的大小。当光学传感器输出的接触信息指示的光强小于或等于预设值时,可以确定设置该传感器的运动单元与目标接触;反之,如果光学传感器输出的接触信息指示的光强大于预设值,则可以确定设置该传感器的运动单元未与目标接触。An optical sensor may be disposed on the top of the motion unit 110 . The contact information output by the optical sensor can be used to indicate the magnitude of the light intensity. When the light intensity indicated by the contact information output by the optical sensor is less than or equal to the preset value, it can be determined that the motion unit setting the sensor is in contact with the target; otherwise, if the light intensity indicated by the contact information output by the optical sensor is greater than the preset value, then It can be determined that the motion unit on which the sensor is provided is not in contact with the target.
可以采用图2所示的方法对机械矩阵100进行控制。The mechanical matrix 100 can be controlled by the method shown in FIG. 2 .
图2是本申请实施例提供的一种机械矩阵的控制方法的示意性流程图。Fig. 2 is a schematic flowchart of a method for controlling a mechanical matrix provided by an embodiment of the present application.
机械矩阵包括多个运动单元,每个运动单元上设置有传感器。具体地,可以参见图1的说明。The mechanical matrix includes multiple motion units, each of which is provided with a sensor. Specifically, reference may be made to the description of FIG. 1 .
机械矩阵的控制方法1000包括步骤S1010至S1020。The control method 1000 of the mechanical matrix includes steps S1010 to S1020.
在S1010,获取所述多个运动单元上设置的传感器输出的接触信息,所述接触信息用于指示运动单元的顶端是否与目标接触。At S1010, acquire contact information output by sensors provided on the plurality of motion units, where the contact information is used to indicate whether the tip of the motion unit is in contact with the target.
在S1020,根据所述接触信息,调整至少一个所述运动单元的顶端的高度,所述至少一个运动单元包括接触运动单元和/或邻近运动单元,所述接触运动单元的顶端与所述目标接触,所述邻近运动单元与所述接触运动单元距离小于预设值。At S1020, adjust the height of the tip of at least one of the motion units according to the contact information, the at least one motion unit includes a contact motion unit and/or an adjacent motion unit, and the top of the contact motion unit is in contact with the target , the distance between the adjacent motion unit and the contact motion unit is smaller than a preset value.
通过在运动单元上设置传感器,传感器输出的接触信息用于指示运动单元是否与目标接触,在运动单元与目标接触的情况下,调整运动单元的顶端的高度,以调整运动单元所形成的立体形状。从而,对于机械矩阵中各个运动单元形成的立体形状的调整方式更为灵活。By setting a sensor on the motion unit, the contact information output by the sensor is used to indicate whether the motion unit is in contact with the target, and in the case of the motion unit being in contact with the target, adjust the height of the top of the motion unit to adjust the three-dimensional shape formed by the motion unit . Therefore, the adjustment method for the three-dimensional shape formed by each motion unit in the mechanical matrix is more flexible.
可以根据各个运动单元的顶端与目标的接触情况,调整运动单元110的顶端的高度,使得机械矩阵形成的立体形状随着与目标的接触情况发生变化。The height of the top of the motion unit 110 can be adjusted according to the contact between the top of each motion unit and the target, so that the three-dimensional shape formed by the mechanical matrix changes with the contact with the target.
机械矩阵可以用于显示立体形状。Mechanical matrices can be used to display solid shapes.
当用户的手指或其他物体在该立体形象的不同位置上进行触碰、滑动等不同的操作时,形成该立体形状的各个运动单元顶端的传感器输出接触信息。可以根据各个传感器输出的接触信息,确定与该用户操作对应的调整方式,对各个运动单元的顶端的高度进行调整。When the user's fingers or other objects perform different operations such as touching and sliding on different positions of the three-dimensional figure, the sensors at the top of each motion unit forming the three-dimensional shape output contact information. The adjustment mode corresponding to the user operation may be determined according to the contact information output by each sensor, and the height of the top of each motion unit may be adjusted.
例如,机械矩阵显示蛋糕的形状。根据机械矩阵中各个传感器输出的接触信息,在确定目标(如用户的手指等)贯穿的划过蛋糕的上表面的情况下,可以控制用户划过的位置处的运动单元的顶端高度降低,以显示蛋糕被切开后的形状。For example, a mechanical matrix showing the shape of a cake. According to the contact information output by each sensor in the mechanical matrix, when it is determined that the target (such as the user's finger, etc.) penetrates through the upper surface of the cake, the top height of the motion unit at the position where the user swipe can be controlled to decrease, so as to Shows the shape of the cake after it has been cut.
机械矩阵可以用于置物。Mechanical Matrix can be used for storage.
在机械矩阵用于放置物品的情况下,各个运动单元的顶端的高度是指绝对高度。绝对高度,也可以称为海拔高度,是指距海平面的垂直距离,或者说以平均海水面作为基准平面的高度。In the case where a mechanical matrix is used to place items, the height of the top of each motion unit refers to the absolute height. Absolute height, also known as altitude, refers to the vertical distance from the sea level, or the height with the mean sea level as the reference plane.
在机械矩阵可以用于置物的情况下,在进行S1020得到的调整后的机械矩阵中,所述 第一运动单元和所述第二运动单元形成的凹陷结构。第一运动单元的顶端的高度小于第二运动单元的顶端的高度,所述第二运动单元环绕在所述第一运动单元周围。在调整后的所述机械阵列中,所述第一运动单元包括所述接触运动单元。In the case that the mechanical matrix can be used for placing objects, in the adjusted mechanical matrix obtained by performing S1020, the first motion unit and the second motion unit form a concave structure. The height of the top of the first motion unit is smaller than the height of the top of the second motion unit, and the second motion unit surrounds the first motion unit. In the adjusted mechanical array, the first motion unit includes the contact motion unit.
通过控制机械矩阵中至少一个运动单元的顶端的高度,使得第一运动单元和环绕第一运动单元的第二运动单元形成的凹陷结构。第一运动单元包括接触运动单元,也就是目标位于凹陷结构中,从而凹陷结构可以对目标运动的运动范围形成限制,提高放置物品时的稳定性。By controlling the height of the top of at least one motion unit in the mechanical matrix, the concave structure formed by the first motion unit and the second motion units surrounding the first motion unit is formed. The first movement unit includes a contact movement unit, that is, the target is located in the recessed structure, so that the recessed structure can limit the movement range of the target and improve the stability when placing objects.
置物架的形状是固定的,在使用者未在置物架中放置物品时,置物架占用空间。当目标与机械矩阵中运动单元的接触时,对运动单元的高度进行调整,形成凹陷结构,即形成置物架。置物架是在放置物品时形成的,从而减小置物架对空间的占用。The shape of the storage rack is fixed, and when the user does not place items in the storage rack, the storage rack takes up space. When the target is in contact with the motion unit in the mechanical matrix, the height of the motion unit is adjusted to form a recessed structure, that is, a shelf is formed. The storage rack is formed when items are placed, thereby reducing the space occupied by the storage rack.
应当理解,接触运动单元的数量可以为多个,第一运动单元可以包括机械阵列中所有的接触运动单元。It should be understood that there may be multiple contact motion units, and the first motion unit may include all contact motion units in the mechanical array.
由于放置在机械矩阵上的目标的数量可以为多个。可以将连续的接触运动单元理解为对应于一个目标。从而,可以调整各个运动单元的顶端高度,为形成每个目标对应的凹陷结构。下面以目标的数量为一个为例进行说明。Since the number of targets placed on the mechanical matrix can be multiple. Successive contact motion units can be understood as corresponding to one target. Therefore, the height of the top of each movement unit can be adjusted to form a concave structure corresponding to each target. In the following, the number of targets is taken as an example for description.
第一运动单元的数量可以为多个。调整后的所述机械矩阵中,第一运动单元包括接触运动单元。第一运动单元可以仅包括接触运动单元,也可以包括邻近运动单元,还可以包括其他的运动单元。There may be multiple first motion units. In the adjusted mechanical matrix, the first motion unit includes a contact motion unit. The first motion unit may only include contact motion units, may also include adjacent motion units, and may also include other motion units.
第一运动单元均可以为接触运动单元。位于目标下方的第一运动单元均与目标接触,为目标提供稳定的支撑,提高放置物品的稳定性。Each of the first motion units may be a contact motion unit. The first motion units located below the target are all in contact with the target, providing stable support for the target, and improving the stability of placed objects.
第二运动单元可以包括邻近运动单元。也就是说,第二运动单元与第一运动单元的距离可以小于或等于预设值。The second motion unit may include an adjacent motion unit. That is to say, the distance between the second movement unit and the first movement unit may be less than or equal to a preset value.
位于目标周围的第二运动单元与位于目标下方的第一运动单元之间的距离小于或等于预设值,使得凹陷结构的形状和大小适应于目标的形状,提高放置物品的稳定性。The distance between the second movement unit located around the target and the first movement unit located below the target is less than or equal to a preset value, so that the shape and size of the recessed structure adapt to the shape of the target and improve the stability of placed items.
该机械矩阵可以位于车辆中。车辆可以为轿车、卡车、摩托车、公共汽车、船、飞机、直升飞机、割草机、娱乐车、游乐场车辆、施工设备、电车、高尔夫球车、火车、手推车等运输工具,本申请实施例不做特别的限定。The mechanical matrix may be located in the vehicle. Vehicles can be vehicles such as cars, trucks, motorcycles, buses, boats, airplanes, helicopters, lawn mowers, recreational vehicles, playground vehicles, construction equipment, trams, golf carts, trains, trolleys, etc. Examples are not particularly limited.
车辆行驶过程中可能出现颠簸的情况,可以对放置在机械矩阵上的目标下方的接触运动单元的高度进行调整,以减小目标受到的颠簸。There may be bumps during the driving of the vehicle, and the height of the contact motion unit placed under the target on the mechanical matrix can be adjusted to reduce the bumps on the target.
一方面,可以获取颠簸信息,所述颠簸信息用于指示所述车辆震动的震动方向和震动距离,所述震动方向为与海平面垂直的方向的方向。On the one hand, bump information may be acquired, the bump information is used to indicate the vibration direction and vibration distance of the vehicle vibration, the vibration direction is a direction perpendicular to the sea level.
可以根据所述颠簸信息,确定调整高度差,所述调整高度差与所述震动距离正相关。The adjusted height difference may be determined according to the turbulence information, and the adjusted height difference is positively correlated with the shaking distance.
可以沿与所述震动方向相反的方向,调整所述接触运动单元的顶端的高度,所述接触运动单元的高度变化量为所述调整高度差。The height of the top end of the contact motion unit can be adjusted in a direction opposite to the vibration direction, and the height change of the contact motion unit is the adjusted height difference.
在车辆颠簸的情况下,沿与所述震动方向相反的方向,调整第一运动单元的顶端的高度,调整高度差与车辆颠簸的震动距离正相关,从而可以减小目标与海平面之间距离的变化幅度,减小目标受到的颠簸。In the case of vehicle bumps, the height of the top of the first motion unit is adjusted in the direction opposite to the vibration direction, and the adjusted height difference is positively related to the vibration distance of the vehicle bumps, thereby reducing the distance between the target and the sea level The range of change can reduce the turbulence suffered by the target.
应当理解,在调整各个运动单元的顶端的高度的过程中,接触运动单元可能发生变化。例如,在时刻t0,与目标接触的运动单元为接触运动单元1。在t0时刻,降低接触运动单 元1的高度。在接触运动单元1下降的过程中,接触运动单元1之外的运动单元与目标接触。例如,在接触运动单元1下降的过程中的时刻t1,与目标接触的运动单元为接触运动单元2。接触运动单元2可以包括接触运动单元1中的全部或部分运动单元,接触运动单元2还可以包括接触运动单元1之外的其他运动单元。It should be understood that during the process of adjusting the height of the tip of each movement unit, the contact movement unit may change. For example, at time t0, the moving unit in contact with the target is the touching moving unit 1 . At time t0, the height of the contact motion unit 1 is lowered. During the descending process of the contact motion unit 1 , the motion units other than the contact motion unit 1 contact the target. For example, at time t1 during the descent of the contact movement unit 1 , the movement unit in contact with the target is the contact movement unit 2 . The contact sport unit 2 may include all or part of the contact sport unit 1 , and the contact sport unit 2 may also include other contact sport units other than the contact sport unit 1 .
应当理解,根据颠簸信息对接触运动单元的高度进行调整的过程中,新的与目标接触的目标单元也可以作为接触运动单元进行高度的调整。It should be understood that during the process of adjusting the height of the contact motion unit according to the jolt information, the new target unit that is in contact with the target can also be used as the contact motion unit for height adjustment.
另一方面,可以在所述车辆的颠簸状态下,根据第一传感器输出的第一接触信息,调整所述接触运动单元的顶端的高度,以使得第一压力与第二压力之间的差异最小,所述第一接触信息用于指示所述第一压力,所述第一压力为所述车辆处于所述颠簸状态下接触运动单元受到的压力,所述第二压力为所述车辆处于平稳行驶状态下接触运动单元受到的压力。On the other hand, the height of the tip of the contact motion unit may be adjusted according to the first contact information output by the first sensor in the bumpy state of the vehicle, so that the difference between the first pressure and the second pressure is minimized , the first contact information is used to indicate the first pressure, the first pressure is the pressure on the contact motion unit when the vehicle is in the bumpy state, and the second pressure is the pressure when the vehicle is in a smooth running state The pressure on the contact motion unit in the state.
所述第一传感器可以设置在所述接触运动单元。The first sensor may be provided at the contact motion unit.
可以根据颠簸信息或其他信息确定车辆处于颠簸状态。例如,在颠簸信息指示车辆的震动距离大于预设值的情况下,可以确定车辆处于颠簸状态。It may be determined that the vehicle is in a bumpy state based on the bumpy information or other information. For example, if the bump information indicates that the vibration distance of the vehicle is greater than a preset value, it may be determined that the vehicle is in a bump state.
应当理解,第二压力可以是车辆处于所述颠簸状态的情况第一传感器输出的压力。或者,第二压力也可以一段时间内第一传感器输出的压力的平均值。It should be understood that the second pressure may be the pressure output by the first sensor when the vehicle is in the bumpy state. Alternatively, the second pressure may also be an average value of the pressure output by the first sensor within a period of time.
通过在车辆颠簸的过程中,调整接触运动单元的顶端的高度,使得颠簸状态下接触运动单元受到的第一压力与平稳行驶情况下接触运动单元受到的第二压力之间的差值,可以减小目标受到的颠簸。By adjusting the height of the top end of the contact motion unit during the bumping process of the vehicle, the difference between the first pressure on the contact motion unit in a bumpy state and the second pressure on the contact motion unit in a smooth driving situation can be reduced. The bumps on the small target.
具体地,可以根据颠簸状态下接触运动单元受到的第一压力与平稳行驶情况下接触运动单元受到的第二压力之间的差值,对调整高度差与震动距离的正相关系数进行调整,从而对调整高度差进行修正,进一步减小目标受到的颠簸。Specifically, the positive correlation coefficient between the adjustment height difference and the vibration distance can be adjusted according to the difference between the first pressure on the contact motion unit in a bumpy state and the second pressure on the contact motion unit in a smooth driving state, so that Correct the adjustment height difference to further reduce the turbulence suffered by the target.
接触运动单元受到的压力,可以理解为竖直方向的压力分量。The pressure on the contact motion unit can be understood as the pressure component in the vertical direction.
在机械矩阵用于置物的情况下,当放置在机械矩阵上的目标为电子显示设备时,还可以通过调整机械矩阵中运动单元的高度,调整电子显示设备的朝向。In the case where the mechanical matrix is used for placing objects, when the target placed on the mechanical matrix is an electronic display device, the orientation of the electronic display device can also be adjusted by adjusting the height of the motion unit in the mechanical matrix.
具体地,调整后的所述机械矩阵中,所述接触运动单元形成支架,所述支架用于设置所述目标的朝向。Specifically, in the adjusted mechanical matrix, the contact motion unit forms a bracket, and the bracket is used to set the orientation of the target.
进一步地,可以根据每个传感器输出的所述接触信息,确定所述目标是否为电子显示设备。Further, it may be determined whether the target is an electronic display device according to the contact information output by each sensor.
支架可以使得目标朝向某个预设方向。The bracket can make the target face a certain preset direction.
或者,可以获取头部位置信息,所述头部位置信息用于指示所述使用者的头部的位置。从而,形成的支架可以使得目标朝向使用者的头部。Alternatively, head position information may be acquired, where the head position information is used to indicate the position of the user's head. Thus, the brace is formed so that the target is directed toward the user's head.
头部位置信息可以是根据摄像头采集的图像信息确定的。The head position information may be determined according to the image information collected by the camera.
例如,机械矩阵可以位于车辆中驾驶员座椅的周围,车辆中的摄像头可以采集驾驶员的头部的图像,从而看,可以确定驾驶员的头部位置。头部位置信息可以用于指示驾驶员的头部位置。For example, the mechanical matrix can be located around the driver's seat in the vehicle, and cameras in the vehicle can capture images of the driver's head so that the position of the driver's head can be determined. Head position information may be used to indicate the driver's head position.
进一步地,还可以获取头部姿态信息,头部姿态信息用于指示使用者的头部的对称平面。Further, head posture information may also be acquired, and the head posture information is used to indicate the symmetry plane of the user's head.
头部姿态信息可以包括使用者面部的朝向。根据头部姿态信息和头部位置信息,可以 确定使用者的头部的对称平面。The head pose information may include the orientation of the user's face. According to the head posture information and the head position information, the symmetry plane of the user's head can be determined.
可以根据所述头部姿态信息,确定目标位置,所述目标位置位于所述对称平面。A target position may be determined according to the head posture information, and the target position is located on the symmetry plane.
可以调整至少一个所述运动单元的高度以形成坡面,以使得所述目标滑动至所述目标位置。支架可以位于所述目标位置。也就是说,支架可以用于设置位于目标位置的目标的朝向。The height of at least one of the moving units may be adjusted to form a slope, so that the target slides to the target position. A stent can be located at the target location. That is, the bracket can be used to set the orientation of the target at the target location.
将电子显示设备设置在头部的对称平面,可以使得使用者的双眼与电子显示设备的距离相等,提高用户体验。Setting the electronic display device on the symmetrical plane of the head can make the distance between the user's eyes and the electronic display device equal, thereby improving user experience.
进一步地,所述头部姿态信息还用于指示所述使用者的直视方向。在使得目标滑动至所述目标位置时,形成的坡面还可以改变目标的底边与该直视方向之间的夹角。目标在所述坡面的滑动后,目标的底边可以与该直视方向垂直。Further, the head posture information is also used to indicate the direct-looking direction of the user. When the target slides to the target position, the formed slope can also change the angle between the bottom edge of the target and the direct viewing direction. After the target slides on the slope, the bottom edge of the target may be perpendicular to the direct viewing direction.
所述支架的形成可以使得所述目标绕所述底边转动,绕底边转动后的目标朝向使用者的头部。The bracket is formed so that the target can rotate around the bottom edge, and the target rotated around the bottom edge faces the user's head.
通过调整运动单元顶端的高度,可以使得目标的滑动。目标的滑动使得目标的底边所在的与目标的显示平面垂直的平面与使用者头部的对称平面垂直。也就是说,目标的滑动使得目标的底边与使用者脸部所在的平面平行。之后,支架的形成可以使得目标的底边可以与对称平面垂直,并使得买目标朝向使用者的头部。By adjusting the height of the top of the motor unit, the sliding of the target can be made. The sliding of the target makes the plane perpendicular to the display plane of the target where the bottom edge of the target is located be perpendicular to the symmetry plane of the user's head. That is, the object slides so that the bottom edge of the object is parallel to the plane of the user's face. Afterwards, the support can be formed so that the bottom edge of the target can be perpendicular to the symmetry plane and make the target face the user's head.
从而可以较为容易的使目标朝向使用者头部,是目标的显示符合使用需求,提高用户体验。Therefore, it is relatively easy to make the target face the user's head, so that the display of the target meets the usage requirements and improves the user experience.
在一些实施例中,目标在所述坡面的滑动后,可以与使用者头部的对称平面垂直。In some embodiments, the target may be perpendicular to the symmetry plane of the user's head after sliding on the slope.
为了提高用户体验,机械阵列可以用于显示图像。多个运动单元可以对应于图像的多个像素,不同的像素可以显示相同或不同的颜色。To improve user experience, mechanical arrays can be used to display images. Multiple motion units may correspond to multiple pixels of an image, and different pixels may display the same or different colors.
在至少一个所述运动单元的顶端与目标接触的情况下,除调整运动单元的高度,还可以调整各个运动单元对应的颜色。也就是说,根据所述接触信息,可以调整至少一个所述像素的颜色,所述至少一个像素是所述接触运动单元、所述邻近运动单元中的至少一个运动单元对应的像素。。When the tip of at least one of the motion units is in contact with the target, in addition to adjusting the height of the motion unit, the color corresponding to each motion unit can also be adjusted. That is to say, according to the contact information, the color of at least one pixel may be adjusted, and the at least one pixel is a pixel corresponding to at least one of the contact motion unit and the adjacent motion unit. .
像素的颜色可以通过像素值表示。图像的像素值可以是一个红绿蓝(RGB)颜色值,像素值可以是表示颜色的长整数。例如,像素值为256*Red+100*Green+76Blue,其中,Blue代表蓝色分量,Green代表绿色分量,Red代表红色分量。各个颜色分量中,数值越小,亮度越低,数值越大,亮度越高。对于灰度图像来说,像素值可以是灰度值。The color of a pixel can be represented by a pixel value. The pixel value of the image can be a red-green-blue (RGB) color value, and the pixel value can be a long integer representing the color. For example, the pixel value is 256*Red+100*Green+76Blue, where Blue represents a blue component, Green represents a green component, and Red represents a red component. In each color component, the smaller the value, the lower the brightness, and the larger the value, the higher the brightness. For grayscale images, the pixel values may be grayscale values.
通过在运动单元上设置传感器,根据运动单元与目标的接触情况,调整运动单元对应的像素的颜色,对于机械矩阵中各个运动单元形成的立体形状显示的图像的调整方式更为灵活。By installing a sensor on the motion unit and adjusting the color of the pixel corresponding to the motion unit according to the contact between the motion unit and the target, the adjustment method for the image displayed in the three-dimensional shape formed by each motion unit in the mechanical matrix is more flexible.
图3是本申请实施例提供的一种机械矩阵的控制方法的示意性流程图。Fig. 3 is a schematic flowchart of a method for controlling a mechanical matrix provided by an embodiment of the present application.
在车辆前排座椅的附近,一般设计有杯架。在车辆行驶过程中,可以将水杯等物品放置在杯架中,能够防止车辆行驶过程中由于颠簸导致水杯倾倒。杯架也可以作为储物空间放置手机、钥匙等等随身物品,十分方便。Near the front seat of the vehicle, a cup holder is generally designed. During the running of the vehicle, items such as water cups can be placed in the cup holder, which can prevent the water cups from toppling over due to bumps during the running of the vehicle. The cup holder can also be used as a storage space for storing mobile phones, keys and other personal belongings, which is very convenient.
一般情况下,为了使得水杯放在杯架中稳固,杯架形状和大小受限,无法放置大件物品,降低了水杯架作为储物空间给使用者带来的便利性。Generally, in order to make the water cup stable in the cup holder, the shape and size of the cup holder are limited, and it is impossible to place large items, which reduces the convenience of the water cup holder as a storage space for users.
机械矩阵可以位于车辆的座舱内。机械矩阵可以位于驾驶位与副驾驶位的座椅之间, 也可以位于其他位置,如后排座椅处。机械矩阵可以与座椅的高度相同,或者也可以略高于或略低于座椅高度,以方便驾驶员或其他车辆使用者在机械矩阵上放置物品。The mechanical matrix may be located in the cabin of the vehicle. The mechanical matrix can be located between the driver's and passenger's seats, or it can be located elsewhere, such as at the rear seats. The mechanical matrix can be at the same height as the seat, or it can be slightly higher or lower than the seat height to facilitate placement of items on the mechanical matrix by the driver or other vehicle users.
机械矩阵可以包括多个运动单元。以机械矩阵的各个运动单元为形状相同的支撑杆为例进行说明。机械矩阵中,多个支撑杆以矩阵的形式设置,每个支撑杆的可以沿该支撑杆的纵向上下移动。机械矩阵上可以放置物品。机械矩阵也可以称为置物阵列或置物台等。A mechanical matrix can include multiple motion units. It is illustrated by taking each motion unit of the mechanical matrix as a support rod with the same shape as an example. In the mechanical matrix, multiple support rods are arranged in a matrix, and each support rod can move up and down along the longitudinal direction of the support rod. Items can be placed on the Mechanical Matrix. The mechanical matrix can also be called a storage array or a storage table, etc.
机械矩阵的控制方法200可以由表面控制模块执行。机械矩阵的控制方法200包括S210-S250。The control method 200 of the mechanical matrix may be performed by a surface control module. The control method 200 of the mechanical matrix includes S210-S250.
在S210,将该多个支撑杆的顶端设置于初始水平面。In S210, the top ends of the plurality of support rods are set at an initial horizontal plane.
每个支撑杆均既可以向初始水平面的上方,也可以向初始水平面的下方移动。例如,顶端位于初始平面的支撑杆位于该支撑杆的活动范围的中间位置。Each support rod can be moved above or below the initial horizontal plane. For example, a support rod whose tip is located in the initial plane is located in the middle of the range of motion of the support rod.
在S220,确定与目标接触的支撑杆。At S220, a support rod in contact with the target is determined.
目标可以是驾驶员或车辆中的其他成员在机械矩阵上放置的物品。Targets can be items placed on the Mechanical Matrix by the driver or other members of the vehicle.
每个支撑杆的顶端设置有传感器。例如,可以是压力传感器或光传感器。表面控制模块可以接收各个传感器输出的信息,并根据各个传感器输出的信息,确定与目标接触的支撑杆。The top of each support rod is provided with a sensor. For example, it could be a pressure sensor or a light sensor. The surface control module can receive the information output by each sensor, and determine the support rod in contact with the target according to the information output by each sensor.
压力传感器用于感受压力信号,并将压力信号转换成电信号输出。当支撑杆顶端的压力传感器的输出信号指示的压力大于或等于预设值时,确定该支撑杆顶端与目标接触。The pressure sensor is used to sense the pressure signal and convert the pressure signal into an electrical signal for output. When the pressure indicated by the output signal of the pressure sensor at the top of the support rod is greater than or equal to a preset value, it is determined that the top of the support rod is in contact with the target.
光传感器用于感受光强信号,并将光强信号转换成电信号输出。当支撑杆顶端的光传感器的输出信号指示的光强小于预设值时,确定该支撑杆顶端与目标接触。The light sensor is used to sense the light intensity signal and convert the light intensity signal into an electrical signal for output. When the light intensity indicated by the output signal of the light sensor at the top of the support rod is less than a preset value, it is determined that the top of the support rod is in contact with the target.
在S230,确定目标是否为电子显示设备。At S230, it is determined whether the target is an electronic display device.
可以根据与目标接触的支撑杆所在区域的形状,确定目标是否为电子显示设备。Whether the target is an electronic display device can be determined according to the shape of the area where the support rod in contact with the target is located.
进一步地,当支撑杆上设置的传感器为压力传感器时,还可以根据每个与目标接触的支撑杆顶端设置的传感器指示的压力,确定目标是否为电子显示设备。Further, when the sensor provided on the support rod is a pressure sensor, it can also be determined whether the target is an electronic display device according to the pressure indicated by the sensor provided at the top of each support rod in contact with the target.
可以结合智能手机、平板电脑等电子显示设备的尺寸信息、质量信息等,确定目标是否为电子显示设备。具体地,可以参见图3的说明。The size information and quality information of electronic display devices such as smart phones and tablet computers can be combined to determine whether the target is an electronic display device. Specifically, reference may be made to the description of FIG. 3 .
如果确定目标为电子显示设备,进行S240。If it is determined that the target is an electronic display device, go to S240.
在S240,以支架模式对支撑杆的高度进行调整。In S240, the height of the support bar is adjusted in the stand mode.
支架模式调整支撑杆的高度,可以形成支架,使得电子显示设备用于显示的表面朝向驾驶员。具体地,可以参见图4的说明。The stand mode adjusts the height of the support bar to form a stand so that the display surface of the electronic display device faces the driver. Specifically, reference may be made to the description of FIG. 4 .
当目标为电子显示设备时,调整支撑杆的高度,以使得目标用于显示的表面朝向驾驶员,可以提高驾驶员使用该电子显示设备时的便利性。When the target is an electronic display device, adjusting the height of the support rod so that the surface of the target for display faces the driver can improve the convenience of the driver when using the electronic display device.
如果确定目标不是电子显示设备,进行S250。If it is determined that the target is not an electronic display device, go to S250.
在S250,以置物模式对支撑杆的高度进行调整。In S250, the height of the support rod is adjusted in the storage mode.
以置物模式调整支撑杆的高度,可以形成凹陷结构,使得目标位于凹陷结构中,以使得目标的位置固定。具体地,可以参见图8的说明。Adjusting the height of the support rod in the object placement mode can form a recessed structure, so that the target is located in the recessed structure, so that the position of the target is fixed. Specifically, reference may be made to the description of FIG. 8 .
通过调整多个支撑杆,固定目标的位置,可以避免车辆在颠簸环境中行驶的情况下目标从机械矩阵上掉落。By adjusting multiple support rods and fixing the position of the target, the target can be prevented from falling from the mechanical matrix when the vehicle is driving in a bumpy environment.
图4是本申请实施例提供的一种电子显示设备判断方法的示意性流程图。Fig. 4 is a schematic flowchart of a method for determining an electronic display device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
电子显示设备判断方法300包括S310-S330,可以由表面控制模块执行。表面控制模 块通过执行电子显示设备判断方法300,可以确定目标是否为电子显示设备。The electronic display device judging method 300 includes S310-S330, which can be executed by the surface control module. The surface control module can determine whether the target is an electronic display device by executing the electronic display device judging method 300.
目标位于机械矩阵上,如图5所示。根据各个支撑杆上设置的传感器输出的信息,可以确定与目标接触的支撑杆。与目标接触的支撑杆所在的区域可以称为接触区域。此时,目标与各个支撑杆的接触情况可以如图6所示。每个支撑杆可以表示为一个点,与目标不接触的支撑杆以空心的点表示,与目标接触的点以实心的点表示。The target is located on the mechanical matrix, as shown in Figure 5. According to the information output by the sensors provided on each support pole, the support pole in contact with the target can be determined. The area where the support rods are in contact with the target may be referred to as the contact area. At this time, the contact situation between the target and each support rod can be as shown in FIG. 6 . Each support rod can be represented as a point, the support rod not in contact with the target is represented by a hollow point, and the point in contact with the target is represented by a solid point.
在S310,确定目标底面是否为矩形。具体地,可以进行S311-S313。At S310, it is determined whether the target bottom surface is a rectangle. Specifically, S311-S313 may be performed.
在S311,确定接触区域的顶点。At S311, vertices of the contact area are determined.
电子显示设备一般为矩形,可以确定接触区域在两个垂直的方向上坐标最大和坐标最小的点分别作为顶点。The electronic display device is generally rectangular, and the points with the largest coordinates and the smallest coordinates in the contact area in two perpendicular directions can be determined as vertices respectively.
支撑杆矩阵的横向和纵向相互垂直。根据支撑杆矩阵中各个支撑杆的位置,可以将接触区域的各个顶点表示为:纵向的最上点(x t,y t)、纵向的最下点(x d,y d)、横向的最左点(x l,y l)、横向的最右点(x r,y r)。 The horizontal and vertical directions of the support bar matrix are perpendicular to each other. According to the position of each support rod in the support rod matrix, each vertex of the contact area can be expressed as: the uppermost point (x t , y t ) in the longitudinal direction, the lowermost point (x d , y d ) in the longitudinal direction, and the leftmost point in the horizontal direction Point (x l , y l ), the rightmost point in the horizontal direction (x r , y r ).
在S312,根据顶点确定接触区域的边。In S312, the edges of the contact area are determined according to the vertices.
从最上点(x t,y t)所在的行开始,到最下点(x d,y d)所在的行为止,确定支撑杆矩阵中的边缘点集合。边缘点集合包括:每一行最左侧与目标接触的左侧的边缘接触点、每一行最右侧与目标接触的右侧的边缘接触点,每一列最上侧与目标接触的上侧的边缘接触点、每一列最下侧与目标接触的下侧的边缘接触点。边缘接触点,即与目标接触的点中,位于边缘位置的点。 Starting from the row where the uppermost point (x t , y t ) is located and ending with the row where the lowest point (x d , y d ) is located, determine the set of edge points in the strut matrix. The set of edge points includes: the edge contact point on the left side of each row that is in contact with the target, the edge contact point on the right side of each row that is in contact with the target, and the edge contact point on the upper side of each column that is in contact with the target point, the edge contact point on the lower side of each column where the lowermost side contacts the target. The edge contact point, that is, the point at the edge position among the points in contact with the target.
对边缘点集合中x坐标在x l和x t之间,且y坐标y l和y t之间的点进行直线拟合,可以得到接触区域的边L1的表达式。对边缘点集合中x坐标在x r和x t之间,且y坐标y r和y t之间的点进行直线拟合,可以得到接触区域的边L2的表达式。 The expression of the edge L1 of the contact area can be obtained by fitting a straight line to the points whose x coordinates are between x l and x t and y coordinates y l and y t in the edge point set. The expression of the edge L2 of the contact area can be obtained by fitting a straight line to the points whose x coordinates are between x r and x t and y coordinates y r and y t in the edge point set.
对边缘点集合中x坐标在x l和x d之间,且y坐标y l和y d之间的点进行直线拟合,可以得到接触区域的边L3的表达式。对边缘点集合中x坐标在x r和x d之间,且y坐标y r和y d之间的点进行直线拟合,可以得到接触区域的边L4的表达式。 The expression of the edge L3 of the contact area can be obtained by fitting a straight line to the points whose x coordinates are between x l and x d and y coordinates y l and y d in the edge point set. The expression of the edge L4 of the contact area can be obtained by fitting a straight line to the points whose x coordinates are between x r and x d and y coordinates y r and y d in the edge point set.
对N个点进行直线拟合,每个点可以表示为(x i,y i),x i∈[1,N],y i∈[1,N],i,N均为正整数。可以采用下述公式进行直线拟合: Fit a straight line to N points, each point can be expressed as ( xi , y i ), x i ∈ [1, N], y i ∈ [1, N], i, N are positive integers. The following formula can be used for straight line fitting:
Figure PCTCN2021101254-appb-000001
Figure PCTCN2021101254-appb-000001
其中,a、b为拟合得到的直线表达式的参数。拟合后的直线可以表示为:y=ax+b。Among them, a and b are the parameters of the fitted straight line expression. The fitted straight line can be expressed as: y=ax+b.
从而,根据用于确定每个边的边缘接触点的数量和坐标,可以确定边的直线表达式,即确定了接触区域的各个边,如图7所示。Therefore, according to the number and coordinates of the edge contact points used to determine each edge, the straight line expression of the edge can be determined, that is, each edge of the contact area is determined, as shown in FIG. 7 .
机械矩阵的形状可以是矩形。目标的可能部分区域可能超出机械矩阵的边沿。例如,矩形的电子显示设设备的某个角可能超过机械矩阵的左侧边沿。这种情况下,位于机械矩阵左侧边沿的多个支撑杆与电子显示设设备接触。可以将位于左侧边沿与目标接触的多个支撑杆中的最上点作为一个横向的最左点(x l1,y l1),结合纵向的最上点(x t,y t),计算边L1的表达式;并将位于左侧边沿与目标接触的多个支撑杆中的最下点作为另一个横向的最左点(x l2,y l2),结合纵向的最下点(x d,y d),计算边L3的表达式。 The shape of the mechanical matrix may be rectangular. Possible parts of the target area may extend beyond the edge of the mechanical matrix. For example, a corner of a rectangular electronic display device may extend beyond the left edge of the mechanical matrix. In this case, a plurality of support rods located on the left edge of the mechanical matrix are in contact with the electronic display device. The uppermost point among the multiple support rods on the left edge that is in contact with the target can be taken as a horizontal leftmost point (x l1 , y l1 ), combined with the vertical uppermost point (x t , y t ), to calculate the expression; and the lowest point among the multiple support rods that are in contact with the target on the left edge is taken as another horizontal leftmost point (x l2 , y l2 ), combined with the vertical lowest point (x d , y d ), calculate the expression of edge L3.
在S313,判断是否存在两组边,每个组中的两个边相互平行的边。In S313, it is judged whether there are two groups of sides, and two sides in each group are parallel to each other.
对L1至L4进行分组,每组中的直线是根据完全不同的顶点得到的。可以将L1至L4划分为两组,每组包括两条边,其中,根据最上点与最左点得到的边L1与最下点与最右点得到边L4为一组,根据最上点与最右点得到的边L2与最下点与最左点得到边L3为一组。L1 to L4 are grouped, and the lines in each group are obtained from completely different vertices. L1 to L4 can be divided into two groups, and each group includes two sides, wherein, the side L1 obtained from the uppermost point and the leftmost point and the side L4 obtained from the lowermost point and the rightmost point form a group, and according to the uppermost point and the most The side L2 obtained from the right point and the side L3 obtained from the bottommost point and the leftmost point form a group.
判断对于每一组中的两个边是否平行。Determine whether, for each set, two edges are parallel.
可以计算每个边的倾角。第i个边的倾角可以表示为arctanb i,i=1,2,3,4。 The inclination angle of each edge can be calculated. The inclination angle of the i-th side can be expressed as arctanb i , i=1,2,3,4.
当一组中的两个边的倾角之间的差值小于预设值时,可以确定该两个边平行。预设值例如可以是2°。When the difference between the inclination angles of two sides in a group is smaller than a preset value, it may be determined that the two sides are parallel. The preset value may be 2°, for example.
如果每个组中的边均平行,可以确定目标底面为矩形。也就是说,当arctan b 1-arctan b 4|≤θ且|arctan b 2-arctan b 3|≤θ时,确定目标底面为矩形;否则,确定目标底面不是矩形。其中,θ为预设角度值,例如可以是1°、2°或3°等。 If the sides in each group are parallel, the target base can be determined to be rectangular. That is, when arctan b 1 -arctan b 4 |≤θ and |arctan b 2 -arctan b 3 |≤θ, it is determined that the target base is a rectangle; otherwise, it is determined that the target base is not a rectangle. Wherein, θ is a preset angle value, for example, it may be 1°, 2° or 3°.
当目标底面不是矩形时,可以确定目标不是电子显示设备,进行S250。When the bottom surface of the target is not a rectangle, it may be determined that the target is not an electronic display device, and S250 is performed.
当目标底面是矩形时,进行S320。When the target bottom surface is a rectangle, go to S320.
在S320,确定目标底面的长宽比是否满足预设比值范围。At S320, it is determined whether the aspect ratio of the target bottom surface satisfies a preset ratio range.
可以根据四条边L1至L4,计算目标的长度与宽度,从而确定目标的长宽比。The length and width of the target can be calculated according to the four sides L1 to L4, so as to determine the aspect ratio of the target.
目标的长度l可以表示为:The length l of the target can be expressed as:
Figure PCTCN2021101254-appb-000002
Figure PCTCN2021101254-appb-000002
目标的宽度d可以表示为:The width d of the target can be expressed as:
Figure PCTCN2021101254-appb-000003
Figure PCTCN2021101254-appb-000003
从而可以确定目标底面的长宽比k:Thus the aspect ratio k of the target bottom surface can be determined:
Figure PCTCN2021101254-appb-000004
Figure PCTCN2021101254-appb-000004
预设比值范围可以是根据已知的电子显示设备的长宽比确定的。如表1所示,是不同类型的电子显示设备的参数。The preset ratio range may be determined according to known aspect ratios of electronic display devices. As shown in Table 1, are the parameters of different types of electronic display devices.
表1Table 1
Figure PCTCN2021101254-appb-000005
Figure PCTCN2021101254-appb-000005
Figure PCTCN2021101254-appb-000006
Figure PCTCN2021101254-appb-000006
预设比值范围可以是大于或等于已知的各个类型的电子显示设备的长宽比中的最小值,并且小于或等于已知的各个类型的电子显示设备的长宽比中的最大值。The preset ratio range may be greater than or equal to a minimum value among known aspect ratios of various types of electronic display devices, and less than or equal to a maximum value among known aspect ratios of various types of electronic display devices.
当目标底面的长宽比不满足预设比值范围时,可以确定目标不是电子显示设备,进行S250。When the aspect ratio of the bottom surface of the target does not meet the preset ratio range, it may be determined that the target is not an electronic display device, and S250 is performed.
当目标底面的长宽比满足预设比值范围时,进行S330。When the aspect ratio of the target bottom surface satisfies the preset ratio range, go to S330.
在S330,确定目标对机械矩阵的压力与目标底面面积的比值是否满足预设压强范围。At S330, it is determined whether the ratio of the target pressure on the mechanical matrix to the target bottom surface area satisfies a preset pressure range.
目标底面的面积,可以是根据接触区域的边确定。The area of the target bottom surface may be determined according to the sides of the contact area.
在目标未超出机械矩阵范围的情况下,接触区域为矩形,目标底面面积即为接触区域的面积。When the target does not exceed the range of the mechanical matrix, the contact area is rectangular, and the area of the bottom surface of the target is the area of the contact area.
在目标超出机械矩阵的范围的情况下,接触区域不是矩形,可以根据接触区域确定的目标底面的面积,对目标是否为电子设备进行准确的判断。When the target exceeds the range of the mechanical matrix, the contact area is not a rectangle, and it can be accurately judged whether the target is an electronic device according to the area of the bottom surface of the target determined by the contact area.
预设压强范围可以是大于或等于已知的多个类型的电子显示设备放置在水平面时的压强中的最小值,并且该多个压强中的最大值。The preset pressure range may be greater than or equal to the minimum value and the maximum value of the known pressures when multiple types of electronic display devices are placed on a horizontal plane.
质量为m的电子显示设备放置在水平面上时压强P与电子显示设备的重力相等,可以表示为When an electronic display device with mass m is placed on a horizontal plane, the pressure P is equal to the gravity of the electronic display device, which can be expressed as
Figure PCTCN2021101254-appb-000007
Figure PCTCN2021101254-appb-000007
其中,g为重力加速度。where g is the acceleration due to gravity.
在目标未超出机械矩阵的范围,机械矩阵支撑杆均匀设置且受力均匀的情况下,每个支撑杆的压力F为:Under the condition that the target does not exceed the range of the mechanical matrix and the supporting rods of the mechanical matrix are uniformly set and stressed uniformly, the pressure F of each supporting rod is:
Figure PCTCN2021101254-appb-000008
Figure PCTCN2021101254-appb-000008
其中,ρ为支撑杆的密度。where ρ is the density of the struts.
在目标未超出机械矩阵的范围,机械矩阵支撑杆均匀设置且受力均匀的情况下,对目标的重力与目标面积的比值是否满足预设压强范围的判断也可以转换为对目标覆盖的支撑杆所受压力的判断。In the case that the target does not exceed the range of the mechanical matrix, and the mechanical matrix support rods are uniformly set and the force is uniform, the judgment of whether the ratio of the gravity of the target to the target area meets the preset pressure range can also be converted to support rods covering the target Judgment under pressure.
在机械矩阵的边缘不存在超过三个连续的支撑杆与目标接触时,可以确定目标未超出机械矩阵的范围。When there are no more than three consecutive support rods in contact with the target at the edge of the mechanical matrix, it can be determined that the target is not beyond the range of the mechanical matrix.
当目标的重力与目标底面面积的比值不满足预设压强范围时,可以确定目标不是电子显示设备,进行S250。When the ratio of the gravity of the target to the area of the bottom surface of the target does not satisfy the preset pressure range, it may be determined that the target is not an electronic display device, and S250 is performed.
当目标的重力与面积的比值满足预设压强范围时,可以确定目标是电子显示设备,进行S240。When the ratio of the gravity to the area of the target satisfies the preset pressure range, it may be determined that the target is an electronic display device, and S240 is performed.
图8是本申请实施例提供的一种机械矩阵的控制方法的示意性流程图。Fig. 8 is a schematic flowchart of a method for controlling a mechanical matrix provided by an embodiment of the present application.
如果目标是电子显示设备,表面控制模块可以进行S410-S420,以实现方法S240。If the target is an electronic display device, the surface control module may perform S410-S420 to implement the method S240.
在S410,获取驾驶员的头部位姿。At S410, the driver's head posture is acquired.
驾驶员的头部位姿可以通过头部坐标系的原点在车身坐标系中的位置以及头部坐标系各个坐标轴在车身坐标系指向的方向表示。一般情况下,车辆以质心为原点建立有车辆坐标系。车辆坐标系的x轴可以是车辆行驶的方向,即车头指向的方向,车辆坐标系的y轴可以是车辆的侧向,车辆坐标系的z轴可以是竖直向上的方向。因此,头部坐标系可以理解为局部坐标系。The driver's head posture can be represented by the position of the origin of the head coordinate system in the vehicle body coordinate system and the direction that each coordinate axis of the head coordinate system points to in the vehicle body coordinate system. In general, the vehicle has a vehicle coordinate system with the center of mass as the origin. The x-axis of the vehicle coordinate system can be the driving direction of the vehicle, that is, the direction in which the head of the vehicle points, the y-axis of the vehicle coordinate system can be the lateral direction of the vehicle, and the z-axis of the vehicle coordinate system can be the vertical upward direction. Therefore, the head coordinate system can be understood as a local coordinate system.
头部坐标系的原点为驾驶员头部的中心,x轴为与驾驶员直视方向垂直的水平方向,z轴为从原点指向驾驶员的直视方向,y轴为与x轴垂直且与y轴垂直的方向,y轴可以是指向驾驶员头顶的方向。The origin of the head coordinate system is the center of the driver's head, the x-axis is the horizontal direction perpendicular to the driver's direct viewing direction, the z-axis is the direct viewing direction from the origin to the driver, and the y-axis is perpendicular to the x-axis and aligned with The direction vertical to the y-axis, the y-axis may be a direction pointing to the top of the driver's head.
驾驶员的直视方向也可以理解为驾驶员的正视方向,可以是与驾驶员双眼和嘴部所在的平面垂直或近似垂直的方向。The driver's direct gaze direction can also be understood as the driver's frontal gaze direction, which may be a direction perpendicular or approximately perpendicular to the plane where the driver's eyes and mouth are located.
在车辆中,驾驶员监控系统(driver monitoring system,DMS)可以确定驾驶员的头部的位姿。DMS是一种基于图像处理技术,和/或,语音处理技术,监测车内驾驶员状态的系统,主要用于保障驾驶安全和提升驾驶体验感。DMS可以基于图像识别算法、计算机视觉算法、眼部视线追踪、瞳孔检测等技术,达成驾驶员身份识别或驾驶员状态检测。驾驶员状态检测包括对驾驶员的头部的位姿的检测。In a vehicle, a driver monitoring system (DMS) can determine the pose of the driver's head. DMS is a system based on image processing technology and/or voice processing technology to monitor the status of the driver in the car, mainly used to ensure driving safety and improve driving experience. DMS can achieve driver identity recognition or driver status detection based on image recognition algorithms, computer vision algorithms, eye sight tracking, pupil detection and other technologies. Driver state detection includes detection of the pose of the driver's head.
DMS可以获取摄像头采集的图像。DMS可以图像中驾驶员的头部和眼部,从而确定驾驶员的头部和眼部的位置。例如,DMS可以采用神经网络模型对摄像头采集的图像进行处理,以确定驾驶员的头部和眼部的位置。驾驶员的头部的位置可以表示为驾驶员的头部在车身坐标系中的位置。驾驶员的眼部的位置,可以表示为驾驶员的双眼在车身坐标系中的位置,也可以表示为驾驶员的双眼与驾驶员的头部的相对位置。根据驾驶员的头部和眼部的相对位置,可以确定驾驶员的姿态。The DMS can acquire the images collected by the camera. DMS can image the driver's head and eyes, so as to determine the position of the driver's head and eyes. For example, a DMS can use a neural network model to process images captured by a camera to determine the position of the driver's head and eyes. The position of the driver's head can be expressed as the position of the driver's head in the vehicle body coordinate system. The position of the driver's eyes can be expressed as the position of the driver's eyes in the vehicle body coordinate system, or as the relative position between the driver's eyes and the driver's head. Based on the relative position of the driver's head and eyes, the driver's attitude can be determined.
表面控制模块可以向DMS发送检测请求。DMS根据该检测请求,检测驾驶员头部的位姿。DMS可以向表面控制模块发送驾驶员头部的位姿。表面控制模块与DMS之间的信号传输可以经过智能座舱域控制器(cockpit domain controller,CDC)或车辆识别单元(vehicle identification unit,VIU)的转发。The surface control module can send a detection request to the DMS. The DMS detects the pose of the driver's head based on the detection request. The DMS can send the pose of the driver's head to the surface control module. The signal transmission between the surface control module and the DMS can be forwarded by a smart cockpit domain controller (cockpit domain controller, CDC) or a vehicle identification unit (vehicle identification unit, VIU).
一般情况下,物品使用者在放置物品时,会下意识看向物品放置的位置。可以在确定机械矩阵中至少一个支撑杆与目标接触时,获取驾驶员的头部位姿。Under normal circumstances, when an item user places an item, he or she will subconsciously look at the location where the item is placed. The driver's head pose may be acquired when at least one support rod in the mechanical matrix is determined to be in contact with the target.
在S420,根据驾驶员的头部位姿,调整支撑杆的高度,以使得电子显示设备朝向驾驶员。At S420, adjust the height of the support bar according to the driver's head posture, so that the electronic display device faces the driver.
S420可以由表面控制模块执行。具体地,可以进行S421至S422。S420 may be performed by the surface control module. Specifically, S421 to S422 may be performed.
在S421,根据驾驶员的头部位姿,确定目标位置。In S421, the target position is determined according to the driver's head posture.
目标位置在驾驶员的视线范围内。The target location is within the driver's line of sight.
目标位置可以位于驾驶员头部的对称平面与机械矩阵的表面相交的曲线上。例如,目标位置可以是驾驶员直视的方向与机械矩阵的表面相交的位置。可以是根据驾驶员的头部位姿,确定驾驶员直视的方向。The target position may lie on a curve where the plane of symmetry of the driver's head intersects the surface of the mechanical matrix. For example, the target location may be where the direction the driver is looking directly intersects the surface of the mechanical matrix. It may be based on the driver's head posture to determine the direction the driver is looking directly at.
在CDC接收驾驶员头部的位姿的情况下,也可以由CDC确定目标位置,并向表面控 制模块发送目标位置。目标位置可以用于表示设备坐标系的原点在车辆坐标系中的位置。Where the CDC receives the pose of the driver's head, the target position can also be determined by the CDC and sent to the surface control module. The target position can be used to represent the position of the origin of the device coordinate system in the vehicle coordinate system.
在电子显示设备位于目标位置的情况下,进行S423。In the case that the electronic display device is located at the target position, go to S423.
在电子显示设备不在目标位置的情况下,可以进行S422。并在S422之后,可以进行S423。If the electronic display device is not at the target location, S422 may be performed. And after S422, S423 can be performed.
在S422,调整支撑杆的高度以形成坡面,使得电子显示设备滑动至目标位置。At S422, adjust the height of the support bar to form a slope, so that the electronic display device slides to the target position.
位于坡面的电子显示设备在重力的作用下,从高度较高的位置滑动到高度较低的位置。图9和图10示出了支撑杆形成的坡面,以及位于坡面的电子显示设备的位置变化情况。The electronic display device located on the slope slides from a higher position to a lower position under the action of gravity. 9 and 10 show the slope formed by the support rods, and the position changes of the electronic display device on the slope.
在电子显示设备滑动的过程中,根据支撑杆顶端的传感器输出的信息,可以确定电子显示设备是否到达目标位置。During the sliding process of the electronic display device, according to the information output by the sensor at the top of the support rod, it can be determined whether the electronic display device has reached the target position.
通过S422,可以将目标设置在目标位置。Through S422, the target can be set at the target position.
在S423,调整支撑杆的高度,以形成支架。At S423, adjust the height of the support rods to form a bracket.
通过形成支架,可以使得电子显示设备用于显示的显示表面朝向驾驶员。By forming the stand, it is possible to direct the display surface of the electronic display device for display towards the driver.
具体地,可以建立电子显示设备的设备坐标系,该设备坐标系可以理解为局部坐标系。该设备坐标系的原点可以是电子显示设备的质心或电子显示设备上的其他位置,设备坐标系的z轴方向为与电子显示设备的显示表面相垂直的方向。一般情况下,显示表面为长方形,x轴可以为底边的方向,y轴可以方向为与底边相邻的边的方向,设备坐标系的原点位于电子显示设备的中心。可以预设置底边是长方向的长边或短边。Specifically, a device coordinate system of the electronic display device may be established, and the device coordinate system may be understood as a local coordinate system. The origin of the device coordinate system may be the center of mass of the electronic display device or other positions on the electronic display device, and the z-axis direction of the device coordinate system is a direction perpendicular to the display surface of the electronic display device. Generally, the display surface is rectangular, the x-axis can be the direction of the bottom, the y-axis can be the direction of the side adjacent to the bottom, and the origin of the device coordinate system is located at the center of the electronic display device. The bottom side can be preset to be the long side or the short side in the long direction.
显示表面朝向驾驶员,即设备坐标系的z轴方向指向驾驶员。在一些实施例中,可以使得,设备坐标系的z轴方向与头部坐标系的z轴方向平行。The display surface faces the driver, that is, the z-axis direction of the device coordinate system points to the driver. In some embodiments, the z-axis direction of the device coordinate system may be parallel to the z-axis direction of the head coordinate system.
调整支撑杆的高度以形成坡面,位于坡面的电子显示设备在重力的作用下,可以实现转动。可以调整支撑杆的高度以形成坡面,使得电子显示设备的沿设备坐标系的z轴转动。电子显示设备的沿设备坐标系的z轴方向的转动,使得设备坐标系的x轴在车辆坐标系x-y平面的投影与头部坐标系的x轴在车辆坐标系x-y平面的投影平行。The height of the support rod is adjusted to form a slope, and the electronic display device located on the slope can rotate under the action of gravity. The height of the support rod can be adjusted to form a slope, so that the electronic display device can rotate along the z-axis of the device coordinate system. The rotation of the electronic display device along the z-axis of the device coordinate system makes the projection of the x-axis of the device coordinate system on the x-y plane of the vehicle coordinate system parallel to the projection of the x-axis of the head coordinate system on the x-y plane of the vehicle coordinate system.
应当理解,也可以在进行S422时或者在进行S422之前,对电子显示设备的姿态进行调整,以使得设备坐标系的x轴与头部坐标系的x轴在车辆坐标系x-y平面的投影平行。如图11所示,在进行S422之前电子显示设备位于位置P1,设备坐标系的x轴在车辆坐标系x-y平面的投影与头部坐标系的x轴在车辆坐标系x-y平面的投影之间的夹角为α,α大于0;在进行S422之后电子显示设备位于位置P2,设备坐标系的x轴在车辆坐标系x-y平面的投影与头部坐标系的x轴在车辆坐标系x-y平面的投影平行。It should be understood that the attitude of the electronic display device may also be adjusted during S422 or before S422 so that the x-axis of the device coordinate system is parallel to the projection of the x-axis of the head coordinate system on the x-y plane of the vehicle coordinate system. As shown in FIG. 11 , before performing S422, the electronic display device is located at position P1, the distance between the projection of the x-axis of the device coordinate system on the x-y plane of the vehicle coordinate system and the projection of the x-axis of the head coordinate system on the x-y plane of the vehicle coordinate system The included angle is α, and α is greater than 0; after performing S422, the electronic display device is located at position P2, the projection of the x-axis of the device coordinate system on the x-y plane of the vehicle coordinate system and the projection of the x-axis of the head coordinate system on the x-y plane of the vehicle coordinate system parallel.
可以调整支撑杆的高度以形成坡面,以使得电子显示设备的沿设备坐标系的y轴转动,绕y轴转动后的电子显示设备的设备坐标系的x轴与头部坐标系的x轴平行。The height of the support rod can be adjusted to form a slope, so that the electronic display device rotates along the y-axis of the device coordinate system, and the x-axis of the device coordinate system of the electronic display device after rotating around the y-axis and the x-axis of the head coordinate system parallel.
使得设备坐标系的x轴在车辆坐标系x-y平面的投影与头部坐标系的x轴在车辆坐标系x-y平面的投影平行,并使得设备坐标系的x轴与头部坐标系的x轴平行,可以使得显示设备的底边与驾驶员的直视方向垂直,提高用户体验。Make the projection of the x-axis of the device coordinate system on the x-y plane of the vehicle coordinate system parallel to the projection of the x-axis of the head coordinate system on the x-y plane of the vehicle coordinate system, and make the x-axis of the device coordinate system parallel to the x-axis of the head coordinate system , which can make the bottom edge of the display device perpendicular to the direct viewing direction of the driver, thereby improving user experience.
目标位于目标位置,目标位置位于驾驶员头部的对称平面,在设备坐标系的x轴在车辆坐标系x-y平面的投影与头部坐标系的x轴在车辆坐标系x-y平面的投影平行,且设备坐标系的x轴与头部坐标系的x轴平行的情况下,设备坐标系的z轴与头部坐标系的z轴共面。The target is located at the target position, the target position is located on the symmetry plane of the driver's head, the projection of the x-axis of the device coordinate system on the x-y plane of the vehicle coordinate system is parallel to the projection of the x-axis of the head coordinate system on the x-y plane of the vehicle coordinate system, and When the x-axis of the device coordinate system is parallel to the x-axis of the head coordinate system, the z-axis of the device coordinate system is coplanar with the z-axis of the head coordinate system.
之后,调整支撑杆的高度,使得电子显示设备的沿设备坐标系的x轴转动,如图12所示。沿设备坐标系的x轴转动后的电子显示设备朝向驾驶员。当支撑杆的高度调整使得设备坐标系的z轴与电子显示设备的位置与驾驶员头部的位置之间的角度减小时,可以理解为支撑杆的高度调整使得电子显示设备朝向驾驶员。Afterwards, the height of the support rod is adjusted so that the electronic display device rotates along the x-axis of the device coordinate system, as shown in FIG. 12 . The electronic display device rotated along the x-axis of the device coordinate system faces the driver. When the height adjustment of the support bar reduces the angle between the z-axis of the equipment coordinate system and the position of the electronic display device and the position of the driver's head, it can be understood that the height adjustment of the support bar makes the electronic display device face the driver.
例如,如图13所示,电子显示设备沿设备坐标系(虚线所示)的x轴的转动,可以使得设备坐标系的z轴与头部坐标系(实线所示)的z轴平行。或者,电子显示设备沿设备坐标系的x轴的转动,可以使得设备坐标系的z轴指向驾驶员头部的位置。For example, as shown in FIG. 13 , the rotation of the electronic display device along the x-axis of the device coordinate system (shown by the dotted line) can make the z-axis of the device coordinate system parallel to the z-axis of the head coordinate system (shown by the solid line). Alternatively, the rotation of the electronic display device along the x-axis of the device coordinate system may make the z-axis of the device coordinate system point to the position of the driver's head.
一般情况下,头部坐标系的x轴与车辆坐标系的x-y平面平行或近似平行。机械矩阵的法向一般设置为垂直于车辆坐标系的x-y平面。因此,在使得设备坐标系的x轴在车辆坐标系x-y平面的投影与头部坐标系的x轴在车辆坐标系x-y平面的投影平行的情况下,可以认为设备坐标系的x轴与头部坐标系的x轴平行。之后,可以对调整支撑杆的高度形成支架。支架使得设备坐标系的z轴与头部坐标系的z轴在设备坐标系的y-z平面的投影平行。In general, the x-axis of the head coordinate system is parallel or approximately parallel to the x-y plane of the vehicle coordinate system. The normal of the mechanical matrix is generally set to be perpendicular to the x-y plane of the vehicle coordinate system. Therefore, when the projection of the x-axis of the device coordinate system on the x-y plane of the vehicle coordinate system is parallel to the projection of the x-axis of the head coordinate system on the x-y plane of the vehicle coordinate system, it can be considered that the x-axis of the device coordinate system is parallel to the head The x-axis of the coordinate system is parallel. Afterwards, brackets can be formed for adjusting the height of the support rods. The bracket makes the z-axis of the device coordinate system parallel to the projection of the z-axis of the head coordinate system on the y-z plane of the device coordinate system.
在CDC接收驾驶员头部的位姿的情况下,CDC还可以确定电子显示设备的目标姿态。目标姿态可以用于指示设备坐标系各个坐标轴的方向。目标姿态可以是使得设备坐标系的x轴在车辆坐标系x-y平面的投影与头部坐标系的x轴在车辆坐标系x-y平面的投影平行,设备坐标系的x轴与头部坐标系的x轴平行的情况下,使得电子显示设备朝向驾驶员的z轴方向。Where the CDC receives the pose of the driver's head, the CDC may also determine a target pose for the electronic display device. The target pose can be used to indicate the orientation of each axis of the device coordinate system. The target posture can be such that the projection of the x-axis of the device coordinate system on the x-y plane of the vehicle coordinate system is parallel to the projection of the x-axis of the head coordinate system on the x-y plane of the vehicle coordinate system, and the x-axis of the device coordinate system is parallel to the x-y plane of the head coordinate system. In the case of parallel axes, make the electronic display device face the driver's z-axis direction.
CDC可以向表面控制模块发送目标姿态,从而,表面控制模块可以根据目标姿态调整支撑杆的高度,以调整电子显示设备的姿态,从而使得调整后的电子显示设备的姿态为目标姿态。The CDC can send the target posture to the surface control module, so that the surface control module can adjust the height of the support rod according to the target posture to adjust the posture of the electronic display device, so that the adjusted posture of the electronic display device is the target posture.
在一些实施例中,可以记录用户放置物品的位置。从而可以根据用户的使用习惯,在机械矩阵与目标接触的情况下,调整支撑杆的高度,以使得目标滑动至对应的位置。可以分别记录用户每次放置电子显示设备之外的其他物品的位置以及将其他物品放置在该位置的次数,以及用户放置电子显示设备对应的目标位置以及每个目标位置的次数。从而确定其他物品对应的常用位置、电子显示设备的常用目标位置。In some embodiments, the location where the user places the item may be recorded. Therefore, according to the user's usage habits, the height of the support bar can be adjusted under the condition that the mechanical matrix is in contact with the target, so that the target can slide to a corresponding position. The position where the user places other items other than the electronic display device and the number of times the user places the other items at the position, as well as the number of times the user places the target position corresponding to the electronic display device and each target position can be recorded respectively. Thereby, common locations corresponding to other items and common target locations of electronic display devices are determined.
在机械矩阵与目标接触的情况下,可以确定目标是否为电子显示设备。当确定目标不是电子显示设备时,可以调整支撑杆的高度,以使得目标滑动至该常用位置。当确定目标是电子显示设备时,可以调整支撑杆的高度,以使得目标滑动至该常用目标位置。从而,使得滑动后的目标的位置更符合使用者的习惯。Where the mechanical matrix is in contact with the target, it can be determined whether the target is an electronic display device. When it is determined that the target is not an electronic display device, the height of the support rod can be adjusted so that the target slides to the usual position. When it is determined that the target is an electronic display device, the height of the support rod can be adjusted so that the target slides to the usual target position. Therefore, the position of the slid target is more in line with the habit of the user.
图14是本申请实施例提供的一种机械矩阵的控制方法的示意性流程图。Fig. 14 is a schematic flowchart of a method for controlling a mechanical matrix provided by an embodiment of the present application.
如果目标不是电子显示设备,表面控制模块可以进行S510-S423,以实现方法S250。If the target is not an electronic display device, the surface control module may perform S510-S423 to implement the method S250.
机械矩阵中各个支撑杆的最低点对应的绝对高度相同。各个支撑杆的最低点可以是预设置的。按照图14的方法对机械矩阵进行控制,机械矩阵中支撑杆的高度变化可以如图15所示。The absolute heights corresponding to the lowest points of the various support rods in the mechanical matrix are the same. The lowest point of each support bar may be preset. The mechanical matrix is controlled according to the method in FIG. 14 , and the height change of the support rods in the mechanical matrix can be shown in FIG. 15 .
在S510,目标下方的支撑杆下降至最低点。On the S510, the support rod below the target is lowered to its lowest point.
具体地,可以进行S511-S512。Specifically, S511-S512 may be performed.
在S511,与目标接触的支撑杆下降至最低点。At S511 , the support rod in contact with the target is lowered to the lowest point.
在S512,确定未下降的支杆中,是否存在支撑杆与目标接触。In S512, it is determined whether there is a support rod in contact with the target among the non-falling support rods.
未下降的支杆,可以理解为机械矩阵中未进行S511的支撑杆。The undeclined struts can be understood as the struts in the mechanical matrix that have not been subjected to S511.
如果未下降的支杆中有支撑杆与目标接触,进行S511。如果未下降的支撑杆均位与目标接触进行S520。If any of the support rods that have not been lowered touches the target, go to S511. If the support rods that have not descended evenly touch the target, go to S520.
下降至最低点的支撑杆即为目标下方的支撑杆。The support pole that descends to the lowest point is the support pole below the target.
每个支撑杆上可以设置有压力传感器或光传感器。Each support rod can be provided with a pressure sensor or a light sensor.
与目标接触的支撑杆可以是压力传感器指示压力大于预设值的支撑杆,或者,也可以是光线传感器指示光强大于预设值的支撑杆。也就是说,支撑杆的压力传感器指示的压力很小,例如压力为0时,认为支撑杆未与目标接触;支撑杆的光线传感器指示的光强很小,例如光强为0时,认为支撑杆与目标接触。The support rod in contact with the target may be a support rod whose pressure sensor indicates that the pressure is greater than a preset value, or may also be a support rod whose light intensity is greater than a preset value indicated by a light sensor. That is to say, the pressure indicated by the pressure sensor of the support rod is very small, for example, when the pressure is 0, it is considered that the support rod is not in contact with the target; the light intensity indicated by the light sensor of the support rod is very small, for example, when the light intensity is 0, it is considered to be supported The rod makes contact with the target.
或者,可以通过进行S513-S514执行S510。Alternatively, S510 may be executed by performing S513-S514.
在S513,与目标接触的支撑杆下降至不再与目标接触即停止下降。In S513 , the support rod that is in contact with the target is lowered until it is no longer in contact with the target, that is, the lowering stops.
在S514,判断机械矩阵中的各个支撑杆是否与目标接触。In S514, it is judged whether each support rod in the mechanical matrix is in contact with the target.
如果有支杆中与目标接触,且目标接触的支撑杆的位置高于最低点,进行S511。如果不存在支撑杆均与目标接触,或与目标接触位于最低点,不再进行S513。If any of the support rods is in contact with the target, and the position of the support rod contacted by the target is higher than the lowest point, go to S511. If none of the support rods are in contact with the target, or the contact with the target is at the lowest point, S513 is not performed.
位置高于最低点的支撑结构均与目标不接触的情况下,结束S510。In the case that the supporting structures whose positions are higher than the lowest point are not in contact with the target, S510 ends.
进行S510之后,机械矩阵中,目标下方的支撑杆均位于与目标接触,或位于与目标接触的临界状态。After performing S510, in the mechanical matrix, the supporting rods below the target are all in contact with the target, or in a critical state of contact with the target.
在S520,下降至最低点的支撑杆中,未与目标接触的支撑杆上升至与目标接触的位置。In S520 , among the support rods that have descended to the lowest point, the support rods that are not in contact with the target are raised to a position where they are in contact with the target.
应当理解,在下降至最低点的支撑杆上升的过程中,支撑杆顶端的传感器持续进行检测。当支撑杆与目标接触时,停止对该支撑杆的升高。It should be understood that the sensor at the top of the support rod continues to detect during the rising process of the support rod that has descended to the lowest point. When the support rod comes into contact with the target, the raising of the support rod is stopped.
示例性地,下降至最低点的支撑杆中,未与目标接触的支撑杆可以逐层向外依次升高。Exemplarily, among the support rods that descend to the lowest point, the support rods that are not in contact with the target may be raised layer by layer outward.
在S530,经过S510下降至最低点的支撑杆周围预设距离范围内的支撑杆上升。At S530 , the support rods within a preset distance range around the support rods descended to the lowest point through S510 are raised.
示例性地,该预设距离范围内支撑杆的上升高度可以呈等差数列。Exemplarily, the rising height of the support rod within the preset distance range may be an arithmetic progression.
也就是说,进行S510过程中未与目标接触的支撑杆可以升高的高度可以随着与目标下方是支撑杆的距离的增加而减小。That is to say, during the process of performing S510, the height at which the support rods that are not in contact with the target can be raised decreases as the distance from the support rods below the target increases.
在一些实施例中,在进行S530的过程中,经过S510下降至最低点的支撑杆周围预设距离范围内的支撑杆上升的过程中可能与目标接触。该支撑杆可以在接触目标之后不再升高。In some embodiments, during the process of performing S530, the support poles within the preset distance range around the support poles that descend to the lowest point after S510 may contact the target during the rising process. The support rod may not be raised again after touching the target.
通过S520,使得目标下方的支撑杆均与目标接触,在目标的底部为目标提供稳定的支撑。通过S530,使得目标侧向的支撑杆升高,在侧向为目标提供稳定的支撑,避免目标倾斜或翻倒。Through the S520, the support rods below the target are all in contact with the target, providing stable support for the target at the bottom of the target. Through the S530, the lateral support pole of the target is raised, providing stable support for the target in the lateral direction, and avoiding the target from tilting or falling over.
图16是本申请实施例提供的一种机械矩阵的控制方法的示意性流程图。Fig. 16 is a schematic flowchart of a method for controlling a mechanical matrix provided by an embodiment of the present application.
在车辆行驶过程中,由于路况等因素,车辆可能产生颠簸。为了使得机械矩阵上的物体更加平稳,在方法200或方法300之后,表面控制模块可以采用图16所示的方式对机械矩阵进行控制。During the driving process of the vehicle, due to road conditions and other factors, the vehicle may experience bumps. In order to make the objects on the mechanical matrix more stable, after the method 200 or the method 300, the surface control module can control the mechanical matrix in the manner shown in FIG. 16 .
机械矩阵的控制方法1600包括S1601-S1602。The control method 1600 of the mechanical matrix includes S1601-S1602.
机械矩阵包括第一支撑杆高度,第一支撑杆与目标接触。The mechanical matrix includes a first support bar height, and the first support bar is in contact with the target.
在S1601,获取颠簸信息,所述颠簸信息用于指示车辆震动的震动方向和震动距离。At S1601, acquire bump information, the bump information is used to indicate the vibration direction and vibration distance of the vehicle vibration.
该震动方向向上或向下。震动方向可以指向车辆坐标系的z轴方向的正向或负向,也可以是竖直向上或竖直向下。竖直方向是与地平线垂直的方向。The vibration direction is up or down. The vibration direction can point to the positive or negative direction of the z-axis of the vehicle coordinate system, and can also be vertically upward or vertically downward. The vertical direction is the direction perpendicular to the horizon.
颠簸信息可以是车辆动态控制系统(vehicle dynamics control system,VDC)采集的。表面控制模块可以接收VDC发送的颠簸信息。VDC发送的颠簸信息可以经由CDC转发。The bump information may be collected by a vehicle dynamics control system (VDC). The surface control module can receive the bump information sent by VDC. The thrashing information sent by the VDC can be forwarded via the CDC.
在S1602,根据颠簸信息,确定调整方向和调整高度差,所述调整方向与所述震动方向相反,所述调整高度差与所述震动距离正相关。In S1602, an adjustment direction and an adjustment height difference are determined according to the turbulence information, the adjustment direction is opposite to the vibration direction, and the adjustment height difference is positively correlated with the vibration distance.
在S1603,沿调整方向,调整第一支撑杆的高度,第一支撑杆的高度变化量为调整高度差。In S1603, the height of the first support bar is adjusted along the adjustment direction, and the height variation of the first support bar is the adjusted height difference.
在一些实施例中,调整高度差与车辆的震动距离成反比。In some embodiments, the adjustment height difference is inversely proportional to the shock distance of the vehicle.
进一步地,在S1603,可以沿调整方向对机械矩阵中各个支撑杆的高度均进行调整,或者对与目标接触的第一支撑杆以及环绕在第一支撑杆周围预设距离范围内的支撑杆的盖度进行调整,每个支撑杆的高度变化量为该调整高度差。Further, in S1603, the height of each support rod in the mechanical matrix can be adjusted along the adjustment direction, or the height of the first support rod in contact with the target and the support rods surrounding the first support rod within a preset distance range can be adjusted. The cover degree is adjusted, and the height variation of each support rod is the adjusted height difference.
如图17中的虚线框所示,机械矩阵中存在位于目标的竖直向下的方向的支撑杆。在S1603,如果对环绕在目标周围的支撑杆的高度不进行调整,这些支撑杆在车辆颠簸过程中与目标接触,可能导致目标的颠簸较为明显。沿调整方向对机械矩阵中各个支撑杆的高度均进行调整,可以有效降低目标受到的颠簸。As shown by the dotted line box in FIG. 17 , there are support rods located in the vertical downward direction of the target in the mechanical matrix. In S1603, if the height of the support rods surrounding the target is not adjusted, these support rods will contact the target during the vehicle bumping process, which may cause the bumping of the target to be more obvious. Adjust the height of each support rod in the mechanical matrix along the adjustment direction, which can effectively reduce the bumps on the target.
进一步地,设置在支撑杆上的传感器可以是压力传感器。在S1603之后,可以进行S1604。Further, the sensor provided on the support rod may be a pressure sensor. After S1603, S1604 can be performed.
在S1604,可以根据第一支撑杆上设置的传感器输出的压力信息,调整第一支撑杆的高度。At S1604, the height of the first support rod may be adjusted according to the pressure information output by the sensor provided on the first support rod.
第一支撑杆是与目标接触的支撑杆。第一支撑杆上设置的传感器为第一传感器。The first support rod is the support rod that is in contact with the target. The sensor provided on the first support rod is the first sensor.
在车辆处于平稳行驶的情况下,第一传感器输出的第一接触信息用于指示第一压力。在车辆处于颠簸状态的情况下,第一传感器输出的第一接触信息用于指示第二压力。调整第一支撑杆的高度,以使得第一压力与第二压力之间的差异最小。从而,可以降低目标受到的颠簸。When the vehicle is running smoothly, the first contact information output by the first sensor is used to indicate the first pressure. When the vehicle is in a bumpy state, the first contact information output by the first sensor is used to indicate the second pressure. The height of the first support rod is adjusted to minimize the difference between the first pressure and the second pressure. Thus, the turbulence to which the target is subjected can be reduced.
在一些实施例中,S1601至S1602以及S1604对第一支撑杆进行调整所需的调整方向和距离的确定,可以由CDC执行。CDC可以向表面控制模块发送调整方向和调整高度差。表面控制模块可以根据调整方向和调整高度差确定各个支撑杆的位移,并对支撑杆的运动进行控制。In some embodiments, S1601 to S1602 and S1604 determining the adjustment direction and distance required for adjusting the first support rod may be performed by the CDC. The CDC can send the adjustment direction and the adjustment height difference to the surface control module. The surface control module can determine the displacement of each support bar according to the adjustment direction and the adjustment height difference, and control the movement of the support bars.
图18是本申请实施例提供的一种机械矩阵的控制方法的示意性流程图。Fig. 18 is a schematic flowchart of a method for controlling a mechanical matrix provided by an embodiment of the present application.
机械矩阵包括多个形状相同的支撑杆,该多个支撑杆以矩阵的形式设置,每个支撑杆的可以上下移动。每个支撑杆顶端设置有传感器。The mechanical matrix includes a plurality of support rods with the same shape, the multiple support rods are arranged in a matrix, and each support rod can move up and down. A sensor is arranged at the top of each support rod.
该多个支撑杆对应于多个像素。例如,一个或多个支撑杆可以对应于一个像素,或者一个支撑杆可以对应于多个像素。可以在每个支撑杆的顶部设置显示装置,或者,可以在机械矩阵上进行投影,从而,机械矩阵可以用于显示图像,多个支撑杆可以对应于多个像素。以每个支撑杆的顶部设置显示装置,每个支撑杆对应于一个像素为例进行说明。The plurality of support rods corresponds to a plurality of pixels. For example, one or more struts may correspond to one pixel, or one strut may correspond to multiple pixels. A display device may be provided on the top of each support rod, or projection may be performed on the mechanical matrix, so that the mechanical matrix may be used to display images, and multiple support rods may correspond to multiple pixels. A display device is arranged on the top of each support bar, and each support bar corresponds to a pixel as an example for illustration.
机械矩阵的控制方法1700包括S1701至S1705。The control method 1700 of the mechanical matrix includes S1701 to S1705.
在S1701,表面控制模块向电子控制单元(electronic control unit,ECU)发送表面控制指令。At S1701, the surface control module sends a surface control command to an electronic control unit (ECU).
表面控制指令用于指示显示区域中各个支撑杆的高度和/或运动速度。表面控制指令还用于指示显示区域中各个支撑杆对应的像素的颜色。Surface control commands are used to indicate the height and/or movement speed of each support rod in the display area. The surface control instruction is also used to indicate the color of the pixel corresponding to each support bar in the display area.
显示区域可以是机械矩阵中全部或部分支撑杆所在的区域。The display area can be the area where all or part of the support rods in the mechanical matrix are located.
当机械矩阵表面放置有物品或显示有按钮时,显示区域可以是物品所在区域、按钮所在区域之外的区域。When items are placed on the surface of the mechanical matrix or buttons are displayed, the display area may be an area other than the area where the item is located or the area where the button is located.
在S1702,ECU按照表面控制指令对机械矩阵进行调整。In S1702, the ECU adjusts the mechanical matrix according to the surface control command.
ECU可以按照表面控制指令调整显示区域支撑杆的高度和像素的颜色。The ECU can adjust the height of the support bar and the color of the pixels in the display area according to the surface control command.
S1701-S1702可以仅进行一次,使得显示区域的支撑杆呈现静态的形状。或者,可以多次进行S1701-S1702,从而使得显示区域的支撑杆呈现动态变化的形状。S1701-S1702 may be performed only once, so that the support rods in the display area assume a static shape. Alternatively, S1701-S1702 may be performed multiple times, so that the support rods in the display area present dynamically changing shapes.
在S1703,表面控制模块获取每个传感器输出的接触信息,所述接触信息用于指示所述传感器所在的所述支撑杆是否与目标接触。At S1703, the surface control module acquires contact information output by each sensor, where the contact information is used to indicate whether the support rod where the sensor is located is in contact with the target.
在S1704,表面控制模块向ECU发送调整指令。At S1704, the surface control module sends an adjustment instruction to the ECU.
在S1705,ECU按照调整指令对调整机械矩阵进行调整。In S1705, the ECU adjusts the adjustment mechanical matrix according to the adjustment instruction.
ECU可以按照调整指令调整显示区域支撑杆的高度和像素的颜色。The ECU can adjust the height of the support bar and the color of the pixels in the display area according to the adjustment instruction.
ECU可以调整显示区域中至少一个支撑杆的高度,并调整至少一个支撑杆对应的像素的颜色。The ECU can adjust the height of at least one support rod in the display area, and adjust the color of the pixel corresponding to the at least one support rod.
在S1701之前,CDC可以向表面控制模块发送生成指令,表面控制指令可以是根据生成指令确定的。生成指令可以用于指示显示区域的支撑杆形成的形状、颜色等。表面控制模块可以保存有生成指令与表面控制指令之间的对应关系。Before S1701, the CDC may send a generation instruction to the surface control module, and the surface control instruction may be determined according to the generation instruction. The generation instruction may be used to indicate the shape, color, etc. formed by the support bars of the display area. The surface control module may store the corresponding relationship between the generation instruction and the surface control instruction.
示例性地,在S1701之前,CDC向表面控制模块发送生成指令,生成指令用于指示奶油蛋糕的立体形象。在S1701,表面控制模块向ECU发送奶油蛋糕的立体形象对应的表面控制指令。在S1702,ECU通过对显示区域中各个支撑杆的高度和各个支撑杆对应的像素的颜色的设置,可以将显示区域设置为奶油蛋糕的形状。蛋糕的上表面,可以包括多个凸起,凸起区域的颜色可以与蛋糕上表面平坦区域的颜色不同。例如,蛋糕上表面平坦区域的颜色可以是奶白色(用于表示奶油),凸起的形状可以是文字、水果的轮廓等,凸起处的颜色可以是红色或该水果的颜色。Exemplarily, before S1701, the CDC sends a generation instruction to the surface control module, the generation instruction is used to indicate the three-dimensional image of the cream cake. In S1701, the surface control module sends a surface control instruction corresponding to the three-dimensional image of the cream cake to the ECU. In S1702, the ECU can set the display area in the shape of a cream cake by setting the height of each support rod in the display area and the color of the pixel corresponding to each support rod. The upper surface of the cake may include a plurality of protrusions, and the color of the raised areas may be different from the color of the flat areas of the upper surface of the cake. For example, the color of the flat area on the upper surface of the cake can be milky white (used to represent cream), the raised shape can be text, the outline of a fruit, etc., and the color of the raised place can be red or the color of the fruit.
用户可以用笔尖、纸张边沿等目标划过该蛋糕的上表面。在S1703,CDC获取每个传感器输出的接触信息,以确定形成蛋糕的上表面的各个支撑杆中与目标接触的支撑杆。在S1704,CDC发送的调整指令可以用于指示降低形成蛋糕的上表面的各个支撑杆中与目标接触的支撑杆的高度,以形成凹陷。调整指令还用于指示将该与目标接触的支撑杆对应的像素的颜色调整为黄色或橙色(用于表示奶油下方的蛋糕的颜色)。The user can use the tip of a pen, the edge of a paper, etc. to draw across the top surface of the cake. At S1703, the CDC acquires the contact information output by each sensor to determine the support bar that is in contact with the target among the support bars forming the upper surface of the cake. At S1704, the adjustment command sent by the CDC may be used to instruct to lower the height of the support rods that are in contact with the target among the support rods forming the upper surface of the cake, so as to form a depression. The adjustment instruction is also used to instruct to adjust the color of the pixel corresponding to the support rod in contact with the target to yellow or orange (used to represent the color of the cake under the cream).
示例性地,在S1702,ECU通过设置显示区域中各个支撑杆的高度,可以将显示区域的部分区域设置为平面。ECU通过动态的设置各个支撑杆对应的像素的颜色,显示区域的该部分区域可以显示池塘或湖面的俯视图。例如,该部分区域可以显示池塘中鱼游动的动态场景。Exemplarily, at S1702, the ECU may set a partial area of the display area as a plane by setting the height of each support rod in the display area. The ECU dynamically sets the color of the pixels corresponding to each support rod, and this part of the display area can display a top view of the pond or lake. For example, this part of the area can show a dynamic scene of fish swimming in a pond.
用户可以用指尖或其他物体触碰或划过该部分区域。在S1703,CDC获取每个传感器输出的接触信息,以确定形成蛋糕的上表面的各个支撑杆中与用户的指尖或其他物体等目标接触的支撑杆。在S1704,CDC发送的调整指令可以用于指示调整该部分区域中与目标接触的支撑杆附近的支撑杆的高度,以使得形成立体的波纹。调整指令还用于指示调整该 部分区域中与目标接触的支撑杆附近的支撑杆对应的像素的颜色,以形成水波。The user can touch or swipe across this part of the area with a fingertip or other objects. At S1703, the CDC acquires the contact information output by each sensor to determine the support bar that is in contact with the target such as the user's fingertip or other objects among the support bars forming the upper surface of the cake. At S1704, the adjustment instruction sent by the CDC may be used to instruct to adjust the height of the support rods near the support rod in contact with the target in the partial area, so as to form three-dimensional corrugations. The adjustment instruction is also used to instruct to adjust the color of the pixel corresponding to the support rod near the support rod in contact with the target in the partial area, so as to form water waves.
在支撑杆与目标接触的情况下,根据各个支撑杆顶端甚至的传感器发送的接触信息,对支撑杆的高度进行调整,并对各个支撑杆对应的像素的颜色进行调整,可以提高机械结构显示的图像的灵活性。When the support rod is in contact with the target, the height of the support rod is adjusted according to the contact information sent by the sensor at the top of each support rod, and the color of the pixel corresponding to each support rod is adjusted, which can improve the display accuracy of the mechanical structure. Image flexibility.
在进行S1701之前,CDC可以获取用户的输入信息。用户的输入信息可以用于指示立体形象。CDC可以根据用户的输入信息,向表面控制模块发送与用户指示的立体形象对应的生成指令。从而,用户可以根据自己的喜好选择机械矩阵展示的立体图像。Before performing S1701, the CDC may acquire user input information. The user's input information may be used to indicate the stereoscopic image. The CDC may send a generation instruction corresponding to the three-dimensional image indicated by the user to the surface control module according to the user's input information. Therefore, the user can select the stereoscopic image displayed by the mechanical matrix according to his preference.
图19是本申请实施例提供的一种机械矩阵的控制方法的示意性流程图。Fig. 19 is a schematic flowchart of a method for controlling a mechanical matrix provided by an embodiment of the present application.
机械矩阵包括多个运动单元,每个所述运动单元上设置有传感器。传感器用于输出接触信息,接触信息用于指示运动单元的顶端是否与目标接触。具体地,机械矩阵可以参见图1的说明。The mechanical matrix includes a plurality of motion units, each of which is provided with a sensor. The sensor is used to output contact information, and the contact information is used to indicate whether the tip of the motion unit is in contact with the target. Specifically, reference may be made to the description of FIG. 1 for the mechanical matrix.
机械矩阵的控制方法2200包括S2201至S2203。表面控制模块可以执行S2201至S2203。The control method 2200 of the mechanical matrix includes S2201 to S2203. The surface control module may execute S2201 to S2203.
S2201,获取按钮形成信息。S2201. Acquire button formation information.
可以接收其他设备发送的按钮形成信息。或者,设备中的其他模块生成按钮形成信息并存储在缓存单元或其他存储单元中,设备中的表面控制模块可以从该缓存单元或其他存储单元中读取按钮形成信息。Can receive button formation information sent by other devices. Alternatively, other modules in the device generate button formation information and store it in a cache unit or other storage unit, and the surface control module in the device can read the button formation information from the cache unit or other storage unit.
S2202,根据所述按钮形成信息,根据所述按钮形成信息,调整所述多个运动单元中的第一运动单元、第二运动单元中的至少一个所述运动单元的顶端的高度,以形成按钮,所述第二运动单元环绕所述第一运动单元,调整后的所述机械矩阵中,位于所述按钮所在区域的所述第一运动单元的顶端的高度与所述第二运动单元的顶端的高度不同;S2202. According to the button formation information, according to the button formation information, adjust the height of the top of at least one of the first movement unit and the second movement unit among the plurality of movement units, so as to form a button , the second motion unit surrounds the first motion unit, and in the adjusted mechanical matrix, the height of the top of the first motion unit located in the area where the button is located is the same as the height of the top of the second motion unit different heights;
S2203,输出按键信息,所述按键信息是根据所述第一运动单元上设置的传感器输出的接触信息确定的。S2203. Output key information, the key information is determined according to the contact information output by the sensor provided on the first motion unit.
所述按键信息可以用于指示用户在所述按键上的操作。The key information may be used to indicate the user's operation on the key.
与在平面上进行信息输入的方式相比,通过按钮输入信息更加符合人体工程学的要求,能够提高用户满意度。通过S2201至S2202,在需要用户输入信息的情况下,调整运动单元110的顶端的高度,以形成按钮。与操作台上设置固定的按钮的方式相比,仅在对用户输入勋在需求的情况下形成按钮,可以减小对空间的占用。Entering information via buttons is more ergonomic than entering information on a flat surface and can improve user satisfaction. Through S2201 to S2202, if the user needs to input information, the height of the top of the exercise unit 110 is adjusted to form a button. Compared with the method of setting fixed buttons on the console, the buttons are only formed when the user needs to input and perform the functions, which can reduce the occupation of space.
应当理解,根据按钮形成信息形成的按钮的数量可以是一个或多个。It should be understood that the number of buttons formed according to the button formation information may be one or more.
传感器感应的用户操作可以是按钮处的支撑杆上设置的传感器输出的接触信息。或者,传感器感应的用户操作可以是根据每个按钮处的支撑杆与目标的接触情况确定的。The user operation sensed by the sensor may be contact information output by the sensor provided on the support rod at the button. Alternatively, the user operation sensed by the sensor may be determined according to the contact condition between the support rod at each button and the target.
传感器输出的接触信息可以用于指示设置该传感器的支撑杆是否与目标接触。根据按钮所在位置处的各个支撑杆上设置的传感器输出的接触信息,可以确定用户在多个按钮处的按键顺序、用户在每个按钮处的按压时长等。The contact information output by the sensor can be used to indicate whether the support rod on which the sensor is set is in contact with the target. According to the contact information output by the sensors provided on the respective support rods where the buttons are located, the key sequence of the user at the multiple buttons, the pressing time of the user at each button, etc. can be determined.
输出的按键信息可以发送至用于对用户操作进行处理的处理单元。处理单元在接收按键信息后,可以发送按钮消除信息。表面控制模块可以根据按钮消除信息消除形成的按钮。The output key information may be sent to a processing unit for processing user operations. After receiving the key press information, the processing unit may send the button cancel information. The surface control module can eliminate the formed button according to the button elimination information.
也就是说,在S2203之后,可以获取按钮消除信息。并且,可以根据所述按钮消除信息,调整至少一个所述运动单元的高度,以消除所述按钮。That is to say, after S2203, button cancellation information can be acquired. Moreover, the height of at least one of the motion units may be adjusted according to the button elimination information, so as to eliminate the button.
按钮的消除,可以使得所述第一运动单元与所述第二运动单元的高度相同。或者,也 可以根据按钮消除信息,按照其他方式调整运动单元的高度,以形成立体形状。Elimination of the button can make the height of the first motion unit and the second motion unit the same. Alternatively, the height of the motion unit can be adjusted in other ways to form a three-dimensional shape according to the button elimination information.
图20是本申请实施例提供的一种机械矩阵的控制方法的示意性流程图。Fig. 20 is a schematic flowchart of a method for controlling a mechanical matrix provided by an embodiment of the present application.
机械矩阵包括多个形状相同的支撑杆,该多个支撑杆以矩阵的形式设置,每个支撑杆的可以上下移动。每个支撑杆的顶端设置有传感器。The mechanical matrix includes a plurality of support rods with the same shape, the multiple support rods are arranged in the form of matrix, and each support rod can move up and down. The top of each support rod is provided with a sensor.
机械矩阵的控制方法2300包括S2301-S2308。The control method 2300 of the mechanical matrix includes S2301-S2308.
在S2301,CDC向表面控制模块发送按钮形成请求。At S2301, the CDC sends a button formation request to the surface control module.
CDC可以在需要用户确认是否进行车辆下电或是否打开电子手刹灯等需要用户输入指示的情况下,进行S2301。The CDC may perform S2301 when the user is required to confirm whether to power off the vehicle or whether to turn on the electronic handbrake light, etc. and requires user input instructions.
在S2302,表面控制模块向ECU发送按钮形成指令,按钮形成指令用于指示第一区域内各个支撑杆的高度。At S2302, the surface control module sends a button forming instruction to the ECU, and the button forming instruction is used to indicate the height of each support rod in the first area.
应当理解,机械矩阵上可能放置有物品。形成按钮的第一区域应当与放置物品的位置不同。表面控制模块在进行图2所述的步骤时,可以记录机械矩阵上放置的物品所在的位置。或者,表面控制模块可以根据进行S2301接收按钮形成请求时,机械矩阵各个传感器发送的接触信息,确定与物品接触的支撑杆,从而确定物品所在的位置。表面控制模块根据物品所在的位置,在物品所在的区域之外,确定第一区域。It should be understood that items may be placed on the mechanical matrix. The first area forming the button should be different from where the item is placed. When the surface control module performs the steps described in FIG. 2 , it can record the positions of the items placed on the mechanical matrix. Alternatively, the surface control module may determine the support rod in contact with the item according to the contact information sent by each sensor of the mechanical matrix when receiving the button formation request in S2301, so as to determine the position of the item. The surface control module determines the first area outside the area where the item is located according to the location of the item.
第一区域的形状、第一区域内不同位置的各个支撑杆的相对高度可以是预设置的。The shape of the first area and the relative heights of the support rods at different positions in the first area may be preset.
按钮形成指令可以指示第一区域内各个支撑杆的高度增加或减少,形成凹陷或凸起,从而第一区域内各个支撑杆与第一区域周围的其他支撑杆高度不同。The button forming instruction may instruct the height of each support bar in the first area to increase or decrease, to form a depression or a protrusion, so that the height of each support bar in the first area is different from other support bars around the first area.
在S2303,ECU控制机械矩阵形成按钮。At S2303, the ECU controls the mechanical matrix forming button.
ECU可以按照按钮形成指令,调整机械矩阵中第一区域内各个支撑杆的高度,从而形成至少一个按钮。The ECU can adjust the height of each support bar in the first area of the mechanical matrix according to the button forming instruction, so as to form at least one button.
当第一区域不连续时,可以形成多个按钮。When the first area is discontinuous, a plurality of buttons may be formed.
在S2304,表面控制模块接收第一区域内各个支撑杆顶端设置的传感器的输出的接触信息,根据该接触信息确定用户的输入信息。In S2304, the surface control module receives the contact information output by the sensors provided at the tops of the respective support rods in the first area, and determines user input information according to the contact information.
表面控制模块可以根据第一区域内各个支撑杆顶端设置的传感器的接触信息,确定与用户接触的支撑杆。The surface control module can determine the support rods in contact with the user according to the contact information of the sensors provided at the tops of the respective support rods in the first area.
可以根据与用户接触的支撑杆的形状,确定用户是否按压形成的按钮。支撑杆顶端设置的传感器可以是压力传感器。可以根据各个传感器感应的压力,确定用户是否按压形成的按钮。例如,当各个传感器感应的压力在预设范围时,确定用户按压该按钮。Whether or not the user presses the formed button may be determined according to the shape of the support bar in contact with the user. The sensor arranged at the top of the support rod may be a pressure sensor. Whether or not the user presses the formed button may be determined based on the pressure sensed by the respective sensors. For example, when the pressure sensed by each sensor is within a preset range, it is determined that the user presses the button.
可以根据第一区域各个支撑杆与用户接触的顺序,确定用户对多个按钮的按压或触摸的顺序,或用户的滑动操作等,从而确定用户的输入信息。The user's input information may be determined according to the order in which each support bar in the first area contacts the user, the order in which the user presses or touches the plurality of buttons, or the user's sliding operation, etc.
在S2305,表面控制模块将用户的输入信息发送至CDC。At S2305, the surface control module sends the user's input information to the CDC.
在S2306,CDC向表面控制模块发送响应信息。At S2306, the CDC sends response information to the surface control module.
在S2307,表面控制模块根据响应信息,向ECU发送按钮消除指令,按钮消除指令用于指示第一区域内各个支撑杆的高度。At S2307, the surface control module sends a button removal instruction to the ECU according to the response information, and the button removal instruction is used to indicate the height of each support rod in the first area.
在S2308,ECU控制机械矩阵消除按钮。At S2308, the ECU controls the mechanical matrix cancel button.
ECU可以按照按钮消除指令,调整机械矩阵中第二位置信息指示的区域内各个支撑杆的高度。The ECU can adjust the height of each support rod in the area indicated by the second position information in the mechanical matrix according to the button cancellation command.
按钮消除指令可以指示ECU将第一区域内各个支撑杆调整为相同的高度,从而使得 第一区域内支撑杆的高度相同,即使得第一区域内恢复平整。The button elimination command can instruct the ECU to adjust each support rod in the first area to the same height, so that the height of the support rods in the first area is the same, that is, to restore the level in the first area.
图21是本申请实施例提供的一种车载系统的示意性结构图。Fig. 21 is a schematic structural diagram of a vehicle-mounted system provided by an embodiment of the present application.
车载系统2400包括机械矩阵100、表面控制单元2401、ECU 2402、CDC 2403、位姿检测模块2404、摄像头2405、VDC 2406。其中,表面控制单元2401、ECU 2402、CDC 2403、位姿检测模块2404、VDC 2406中的一个或多个可以集成在一个设备中,或者,表面控制单元2401、ECU 2402、CDC 2403、位姿检测模块2404、VDC 2406可以均为独立的设备。The vehicle-mounted system 2400 includes a mechanical matrix 100, a surface control unit 2401, an ECU 2402, a CDC 2403, a pose detection module 2404, a camera 2405, and a VDC 2406. Among them, one or more of the surface control unit 2401, ECU 2402, CDC 2403, pose detection module 2404, and VDC 2406 can be integrated in one device, or the surface control unit 2401, ECU 2402, CDC 2403, pose detection Module 2404 and VDC 2406 can be independent devices.
机械矩阵100包括多个运动单元,每个运动单元的顶端的高度可调。每个运动单元110上设置有传感器。具体地,可以参见图1的说明。The mechanical matrix 100 includes multiple motion units, and the height of the top of each motion unit is adjustable. Each motion unit 110 is provided with a sensor. Specifically, reference may be made to the description of FIG. 1 .
表面控制单元2401可以接收机械矩阵100中各个传感器发送的接触信息,接触信息用于指示设置该传感器的运动单元是否与目标接触。从而,表面控制单元2401可以根据接触信息,确定机械矩阵100中各个运动单元的调整方式。例如,运动单元的调整方式可以包括运动单元在调整后的高度、调整过程中的运动速度等。表面控制单元2401还可以向ECU 2402发送控制信息,控制信息用于指示机械矩阵100中各个运动单元的调整方式。The surface control unit 2401 can receive the contact information sent by each sensor in the mechanical matrix 100 , the contact information is used to indicate whether the motion unit where the sensor is set is in contact with the target. Therefore, the surface control unit 2401 can determine the adjustment mode of each motion unit in the mechanical matrix 100 according to the contact information. For example, the adjustment method of the exercise unit may include the adjusted height of the exercise unit, the movement speed during the adjustment, and the like. The surface control unit 2401 can also send control information to the ECU 2402, and the control information is used to indicate the adjustment mode of each movement unit in the mechanical matrix 100.
ECU 2402可以接收表面控制单元2401发送的控制信息,并根据该控制信息,控制机械矩阵100中各个运动单元按照该控制信息指示的调整方式进行调整。通过ECU 2402对机械矩阵中各个运动单元的控制,可以实现对机械矩阵形成的立体形象的调整。The ECU 2402 can receive the control information sent by the surface control unit 2401, and according to the control information, control each movement unit in the mechanical matrix 100 to adjust according to the adjustment mode indicated by the control information. Through ECU 2402's control of each movement unit in the mechanical matrix, the adjustment of the three-dimensional image formed by the mechanical matrix can be realized.
在一些实施例中,表面控制单元2401可以根据各个传感器发送的接触信息,确定目标是否为电子显示设备。In some embodiments, the surface control unit 2401 may determine whether the target is an electronic display device according to the contact information sent by each sensor.
在目标不是电子显示设备的情况下,表面控制单元2401可以确定调整方式以使得目标位于机械矩阵各个运动单元形成的凹陷结构中。In the case that the target is not an electronic display device, the surface control unit 2401 may determine an adjustment method so that the target is located in the concave structure formed by each moving unit of the mechanical matrix.
在目标是电子显示设备的情况下,表面控制单元2401可以向CDC 2403发送检测请求。CDC 2403可以向位姿检测模块2404转发该检测请求。In case the target is an electronic display device, the surface control unit 2401 may send a detection request to the CDC 2403. CDC 2403 may forward the detection request to pose detection module 2404.
位姿检测模块2404可以位于DMS中。位姿检测模块2404可以根据该检测请求,对摄像头2405采集的图像进行处理,从而确定驾驶员的头部的位姿。位姿检测模块2404还可以向CDC 2403发送驾驶员的头部位姿。The pose detection module 2404 may reside in the DMS. The pose detection module 2404 can process the image collected by the camera 2405 according to the detection request, so as to determine the pose of the driver's head. The pose detection module 2404 can also send the driver's head pose to the CDC 2403.
CDC 2403还可以根据驾驶员的头部位姿,确定目标位置和目标姿态,并将目标位置和目标姿态发送至表面控制单元2401。目标姿态使得电子显示设备朝向驾驶员。The CDC 2403 can also determine the target position and target posture according to the driver's head posture, and send the target position and target posture to the surface control unit 2401. The target attitude orients the electronic display device toward the driver.
表面控制单元2401可以根据目标位置和目标姿态,确定机械矩阵100中各个运动单元的调整方式。该调整方式使得目标在调整后的机械矩阵中位于目标位置,并处于目标姿态。The surface control unit 2401 can determine the adjustment mode of each motion unit in the mechanical matrix 100 according to the target position and target posture. This adjustment method makes the target at the target position and the target attitude in the adjusted mechanical matrix.
也就是说,在目标是电子显示设备的情况下,车载系统2400可以使得电子显示设备朝向驾驶员。That is, in a case where the target is an electronic display device, the in-vehicle system 2400 may cause the electronic display device to face the driver.
进一步地,在目标放置在机械矩阵上的情况下,如果车辆处于颠簸状态,VDC 2406可以向CDC 2403发送颠簸信息。颠簸信息用于指示车辆震动的震动方向和震动距离。CDC 2403可以根据颠簸信息确定缓冲信息,并将缓冲量发送至表面控制单元2401。缓冲信息可以包括调整方向和调整高度差。调整方向与震动方向相反,调整高度差与震动距离正相关。表面控制单元2401可以根据缓冲信息确定调整方式,以使得机械矩阵各个运动单元按照缓冲信息调整。Further, under the condition that the target is placed on the mechanical matrix, if the vehicle is in a bumpy state, the VDC 2406 can send bumpy information to the CDC 2403. The bump information is used to indicate the vibration direction and distance of the vehicle vibration. The CDC 2403 can determine buffer information according to the jolt information, and send the buffer amount to the surface control unit 2401. The buffer information may include adjusting direction and adjusting height difference. The adjustment direction is opposite to the vibration direction, and the adjustment height difference is positively related to the vibration distance. The surface control unit 2401 may determine an adjustment method according to the buffer information, so that each movement unit of the mechanical matrix is adjusted according to the buffer information.
进一步地,CDC 2403还可以存储每次确定的电子显示设备的目标位置以及每个目标 位置确定的次数。在无法获取驾驶员的头部位姿等情况下,CDC 2403可以向表面控制单元2401发送记录的次数最多的目标位置。当然,CDC 2403还可以记录每次确定的目标姿态以及该目标姿态确定的次数。在无法获取驾驶员的头部位姿等情况下,CDC 2403还可以向表面控制单元2401发送记录的次数最多的目标姿态。Further, CDC 2403 can also store the target position of the electronic display device determined each time and the number of times each target position is determined. In situations such as failing to acquire the driver's head posture, the CDC 2403 can send the target position with the highest number of records to the surface control unit 2401. Of course, the CDC 2403 can also record the target attitude determined each time and the number of times the target attitude is determined. When the head posture of the driver cannot be obtained, the CDC 2403 can also send the most recorded target posture to the surface control unit 2401.
在另一些实施例中,CDC 2403可以向表面控制单元2401发送立体形象信息。表面控制单元2401可以确定与该立体形象信息对应的调整方式,以使得机械矩阵显示该立体形象信息指示的立体形象。In some other embodiments, the CDC 2403 can send the stereoscopic image information to the surface control unit 2401. The surface control unit 2401 may determine an adjustment mode corresponding to the stereoscopic image information, so that the mechanical matrix displays the stereoscopic image indicated by the stereoscopic image information.
上文结合图1至图21的描述了本申请提供的机械矩阵以及本申请的方法实施例,下面结合图22至图24,描述本申请实施例的装置实施例。应理解,方法实施例的描述与装置实施例的描述相互对应,因此,未详细描述的部分可以参见前面方法实施例。The mechanical matrix provided by the present application and the method embodiment of the present application are described above with reference to FIG. 1 to FIG. 21 . The device embodiment of the embodiment of the present application is described below in conjunction with FIG. 22 to FIG. 24 . It should be understood that the descriptions of the method embodiments correspond to the descriptions of the device embodiments, therefore, for parts not described in detail, reference may be made to the foregoing method embodiments.
图22是本申请实施例提供的一种机械矩阵的控制装置的示意性结构图。Fig. 22 is a schematic structural diagram of a mechanical matrix control device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
机械矩阵包括多个运动单元,每个运动单元上设置有传感器。The mechanical matrix includes multiple motion units, each of which is provided with a sensor.
机械矩阵的控制装置2000包括获取模块2010和调整模块2020。The control device 2000 of the mechanical matrix includes an acquisition module 2010 and an adjustment module 2020 .
获取模块2010用于,获取所述多个运动单元上设置的传感器输出的接触信息,所述接触信息用于指示运动单元的顶端是否与目标接触。The acquiring module 2010 is configured to acquire the contact information output by the sensors provided on the plurality of motion units, the contact information is used to indicate whether the tip of the motion unit is in contact with the target.
调整模块2020用于,根据所述接触信息调整至少一个所述运动单元的顶端的高度,所述至少一个运动单元包括接触运动单元和/或邻近运动单元,所述接触运动单元的顶端与所述目标接触,所述邻近运动单元与所述接触运动单元距离小于预设值。The adjustment module 2020 is configured to adjust the height of the top of at least one of the motion units according to the contact information, the at least one motion unit includes a contact motion unit and/or an adjacent motion unit, the top of the contact motion unit is in contact with the The target is in contact, and the distance between the adjacent motion unit and the contacting motion unit is smaller than a preset value.
可选地,所述顶端的高度为绝对高度,所述多个运动单元包括第一运动单元和第二运动单元。Optionally, the height of the top is an absolute height, and the plurality of motion units include a first motion unit and a second motion unit.
对所述至少一个所述运动单元的顶端的高度的调整,使得所述第一运动单元和所述第二运动单元形成凹陷结构,所述第一运动单元的顶端的高度小于所述第二运动单元的顶端的高度,所述第二运动单元环绕在所述第一运动单元周围,在调整后的所述机械阵列中,所述第一运动单元包括所述接触运动单元。The height of the top of the at least one motion unit is adjusted so that the first motion unit and the second motion unit form a concave structure, and the height of the top of the first motion unit is smaller than that of the second motion unit The height of the top of the unit, the second movement unit surrounds the first movement unit, and in the adjusted mechanical array, the first movement unit includes the contact movement unit.
可选地,调整后的所述机械矩阵中,所述第一运动单元为所述接触运动单元,所述第二运动单元包括所述邻近运动单元。Optionally, in the adjusted mechanical matrix, the first motion unit is the contact motion unit, and the second motion unit includes the adjacent motion unit.
可选地,所述机械矩阵位于车辆中。Optionally, the mechanical matrix is located in a vehicle.
获取模块2010还用于,获取颠簸信息,所述颠簸信息用于指示所述车辆震动的震动方向和震动距离,所述震动方向为与海平面垂直的方向的方向。The obtaining module 2010 is further configured to obtain bump information, the bump information is used to indicate the vibration direction and vibration distance of the vehicle vibration, and the vibration direction is a direction perpendicular to the sea level.
装置2000还包括处理模块。处理模块用于,根据所述颠簸信息,确定调整高度差,所述调整高度差与所述震动距离正相关。The apparatus 2000 also includes a processing module. The processing module is used to determine the adjusted height difference according to the turbulence information, and the adjusted height difference is positively correlated with the shaking distance.
调整模块2020还用于,沿与所述震动方向相反的方向,调整所述接触运动单元的顶端的高度,所述接触运动单元的高度变化量为所述调整高度差The adjustment module 2020 is also used to adjust the height of the top of the contact motion unit in a direction opposite to the vibration direction, and the height change of the contact motion unit is the adjusted height difference
可选地,所述机械矩阵位于车辆中。Optionally, the mechanical matrix is located in a vehicle.
所述控制装置还包括处理模块,所述处理模块用于确定所述车辆处于颠簸状态。The control device further includes a processing module configured to determine that the vehicle is in a bumpy state.
调整模块2020还用于,根据第一传感器输出的第一接触信息,调整所述接触运动单元的顶端的高度,以使得第一压力与第二压力之间的差异最小,所述第一接触信息用于指示所述第一压力,所述第一压力为在所述车辆处于所述颠簸状态下所述接触运动单元受到的压力,所述第二压力为所述车辆处于平稳行驶状态下所述接触运动单元受到的压力。The adjustment module 2020 is further configured to, according to the first contact information output by the first sensor, adjust the height of the top of the contact motion unit so as to minimize the difference between the first pressure and the second pressure, the first contact information Used to indicate the first pressure, the first pressure is the pressure on the contact motion unit when the vehicle is in the bumpy state, and the second pressure is the pressure when the vehicle is in a smooth running state The pressure on the contact motion unit.
可选地,所述目标是否为电子显示设备。Optionally, whether the target is an electronic display device.
调整后的所述机械矩阵中,所述接触运动单元形成支架,所述支架用于设置所述目标的朝向。In the adjusted mechanical matrix, the contact motion unit forms a bracket, and the bracket is used to set the orientation of the target.
可选地,控制装置2000还包括处理模块,所述处理模块用于,根据所述接触信息,确定所述目标为电子显示设备。Optionally, the control device 2000 further includes a processing module, the processing module is configured to, according to the contact information, determine that the target is an electronic display device.
可选地,获取模块2010还用于,获取头部位置信息,所述头部位置信息用于指示所述使用者的头部的位置,所述支架使得所述目标朝向所述使用者的头部。Optionally, the obtaining module 2010 is further configured to obtain head position information, the head position information is used to indicate the position of the user's head, and the bracket makes the target face the user's head department.
可选地,获取模块2010还用于,获取头部姿态信息,所述头部姿态信息用于指示所述使用者的头部的对称平面。Optionally, the acquiring module 2010 is further configured to acquire head posture information, where the head posture information is used to indicate the symmetry plane of the user's head.
处理模块还用于,根据所述头部姿态信息,确定目标位置,所述目标位置位于所述对称平面。The processing module is further configured to determine a target position according to the head posture information, and the target position is located on the symmetry plane.
调整模块2020还用于,调整至少一个所述运动单元的高度以形成坡面,使得所述目标滑动至所述目标位置,所述支架位于所述目标位置。The adjustment module 2020 is further configured to adjust the height of at least one of the moving units to form a slope, so that the target slides to the target position, and the support is located at the target position.
可选地,所述头部姿态信息还用于指示所述使用者的直视方向,所述目标在所述坡面的滑动转动使得所述目标的底边与所述直视方向垂直。Optionally, the head posture information is also used to indicate the direct-sight direction of the user, and the sliding and turning of the target on the slope makes the bottom of the target perpendicular to the direct-sight direction.
所述支架的形成使得所述底边与所述对称平面垂直,并使得所述目标朝向所述使用者的头部。The support is formed such that the base is perpendicular to the plane of symmetry and the target is directed toward the user's head.
可选地,所述机械阵列用于显示图像,所述多个运动单元对应于所述图像中的多个像素。Optionally, the mechanical array is used to display an image, and the plurality of motion units correspond to a plurality of pixels in the image.
调整模块2020还用于,根据所述接触信息,调整至少一个所述像素的颜色,所述至少一个像素是所述接触运动单元、所述邻近运动单元中的至少一个运动单元对应的像素。The adjustment module 2020 is further configured to adjust the color of at least one pixel according to the contact information, and the at least one pixel is a pixel corresponding to at least one motion unit among the contact motion unit and the adjacent motion units.
图23是本申请实施例提供的一种机械矩阵的控制装置的示意性结构图。Fig. 23 is a schematic structural diagram of a mechanical matrix control device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
机械矩阵包括多个运动单元,每个运动单元上设置有传感器。所述传感器用于输出接触信息,所述接触信息用于指示运动单元的顶端是否与目标接触。The mechanical matrix includes multiple motion units, each of which is provided with a sensor. The sensor is used to output contact information, and the contact information is used to indicate whether the tip of the motion unit is in contact with the target.
机械矩阵的控制装置4000包括获取模块4010、调整模块4020、输出模块4030。The mechanical matrix control device 4000 includes an acquisition module 4010 , an adjustment module 4020 , and an output module 4030 .
获取模块4010用于,获取按钮形成信息。The obtaining module 4010 is used to obtain button formation information.
调整模块4020用于,根据所述按钮形成信息,调整所述多个运动单元中的第一运动单元、第二运动单元中的至少一个所述运动单元的高度,以形成按钮,所述第二运动单元环绕所述第一运动单元,调整后的所述机械矩阵中,位于所述按钮所在区域的所述第一运动单元的高度与所述第二运动单元的高度不同。The adjustment module 4020 is configured to adjust the height of at least one of the first and second motion units among the plurality of motion units according to the button formation information, so as to form a button, and the second The motion unit surrounds the first motion unit, and in the adjusted mechanical matrix, the height of the first motion unit located in the area where the button is located is different from the height of the second motion unit.
输出模块4030用于,输出按键信息,所述按键信息是根据所述第一运动单元上设置的传感器输出的所述接触信息确定的。The output module 4030 is configured to output key information, the key information is determined according to the contact information output by the sensor provided on the first motion unit.
可选地,获取模块4010还用于,获取按钮消除信息;Optionally, the acquiring module 4010 is also used to acquire button elimination information;
调整模块4020还用于,根据所述按钮消除信息,调整所述第一运动单元、所述第二运动单元中的至少一个所述运动单元的高度,以消除所述按钮。The adjustment module 4020 is further configured to adjust the height of at least one of the first motion unit and the second motion unit according to the button elimination information, so as to eliminate the button.
图24是本申请实施例提供的一种机械矩阵的控制装置的示意性结构图。Fig. 24 is a schematic structural diagram of a mechanical matrix control device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
机械矩阵的控制装置3000包括至少一个存储器3010和至少一个处理器3020,所述至少一个存储器3010用于存储程序,所述至少一个处理器3020用于运行所述程序,以实现前文所述的方法。The control device 3000 of the mechanical matrix includes at least one memory 3010 and at least one processor 3020, the at least one memory 3010 is used to store a program, and the at least one processor 3020 is used to run the program, so as to realize the method described above .
装置2000、装置3000、装置4000可为具有置物和/或人机交互功能的车辆,或者为具有置物和/或人机交互功能的其他部件。该装置包括但不限于:车载终端、车载控制器、车载模块、车载模组、车载部件、车载芯片、车载单元,车辆可通过该车载终端、车载控制器、车载模块、车载模组、车载部件、车载芯片、车载单元,实施本申请提供的方法。The device 2000, the device 3000, and the device 4000 can be a vehicle with a storage and/or human-computer interaction function, or other components with a storage and/or human-computer interaction function. The device includes but is not limited to: vehicle-mounted terminal, vehicle-mounted controller, vehicle-mounted module, vehicle-mounted module, vehicle-mounted component, vehicle-mounted chip, and vehicle-mounted unit. , a vehicle-mounted chip, and a vehicle-mounted unit, implementing the method provided by this application.
装置还可以为除了车辆之外的其他具有置物和/或人机交互功能的智能终端,或设置在除了车辆之外的其他具有置物和/或人机交互功能的智能终端中,或设置于该智能终端的部件中。该智能终端可以为智能运输设备、智能家居设备、机器人等其他终端设备。该装置包括但不限于智能终端或智能终端内的控制器、芯片、传感器、以及其他部件等。The device can also be an intelligent terminal with storage and/or human-computer interaction functions other than the vehicle, or be set in an intelligent terminal with storage and/or human-computer interaction functions other than the vehicle, or set in the Among the components of the smart terminal. The smart terminal may be other terminal devices such as smart transportation devices, smart home devices, and robots. The device includes, but is not limited to, a smart terminal or a controller, chip, sensor, and other components within the smart terminal.
装置2000、装置3000可以是一个通用设备或者是一个专用设备。在具体实现中,该装置还可以台式机、便携式电脑、网络服务器、掌上电脑(personal digital assistant,PDA)、移动手机、平板电脑、无线终端设备、嵌入式设备或其他具有处理功能的设备。本申请实施例不限定该装置的类型。The apparatus 2000 and the apparatus 3000 may be a general-purpose device or a special-purpose device. In a specific implementation, the device can also be a desktop computer, a portable computer, a network server, a personal digital assistant (PDA), a mobile phone, a tablet computer, a wireless terminal device, an embedded device or other devices with processing functions. The embodiment of the present application does not limit the type of the device.
装置2000、装置3000还可以是具有处理功能的芯片或处理器,该装置可以包括多个处理器。处理器可以是一个单核(single-CPU)处理器,也可以是一个多核(multi-CPU)处理器。该具有处理功能的芯片或处理器可以设置在传感器中,也可以不设置在传感器中,而设置在传感器输出信号的接收端。The apparatus 2000 and the apparatus 3000 may also be chips or processors with processing functions, and the apparatuses may include multiple processors. The processor may be a single-core (single-CPU) processor or a multi-core (multi-CPU) processor. The chip or processor with processing function may be set in the sensor, or may not be set in the sensor, but set at the receiving end of the output signal of the sensor.
应理解,本申请实施例中的处理器可以为中央处理单元(central processing unit,CPU),该处理器还可以是其他通用处理器、数字信号处理器(digital signal processor,DSP)、专用集成电路(application specific integrated circuit,ASIC)、现成可编程门阵列(field programmable gate array,FPGA)或者其他可编程逻辑器件、分立门或者晶体管逻辑器件、分立硬件组件等。通用处理器可以是微处理器或者该处理器也可以是任何常规的处理器等。It should be understood that the processor in the embodiment of the present application may be a central processing unit (central processing unit, CPU), and the processor may also be other general-purpose processors, digital signal processors (digital signal processor, DSP), application specific integrated circuits (application specific integrated circuit, ASIC), off-the-shelf programmable gate array (field programmable gate array, FPGA) or other programmable logic devices, discrete gate or transistor logic devices, discrete hardware components, etc. A general-purpose processor may be a microprocessor, or the processor may be any conventional processor, or the like.
还应理解,本申请实施例中的存储器可以是易失性存储器或非易失性存储器,或可包括易失性和非易失性存储器两者。其中,非易失性存储器可以是只读存储器(read-only memory,ROM)、可编程只读存储器(programmable ROM,PROM)、可擦除可编程只读存储器(erasable PROM,EPROM)、电可擦除可编程只读存储器(electrically EPROM,EEPROM)或闪存。易失性存储器可以是随机存取存储器(random access memory,RAM),其用作外部高速缓存。通过示例性但不是限制性说明,许多形式的随机存取存储器(random access memory,RAM)可用,例如静态随机存取存储器(static RAM,SRAM)、动态随机存取存储器(DRAM)、同步动态随机存取存储器(synchronous DRAM,SDRAM)、双倍数据速率同步动态随机存取存储器(double data rate SDRAM,DDR SDRAM)、增强型同步动态随机存取存储器(enhanced SDRAM,ESDRAM)、同步连接动态随机存取存储器(synchlink DRAM,SLDRAM)和直接内存总线随机存取存储器(direct rambus RAM,DR RAM)。It should also be understood that the memory in the embodiments of the present application may be a volatile memory or a nonvolatile memory, or may include both volatile and nonvolatile memories. Among them, the non-volatile memory can be read-only memory (read-only memory, ROM), programmable read-only memory (programmable ROM, PROM), erasable programmable read-only memory (erasable PROM, EPROM), electrically programmable Erases programmable read-only memory (electrically EPROM, EEPROM) or flash memory. Volatile memory can be random access memory (RAM), which acts as external cache memory. By way of illustration and not limitation, many forms of random access memory (RAM) are available, such as static random access memory (static RAM, SRAM), dynamic random access memory (DRAM), synchronous dynamic random access memory Access memory (synchronous DRAM, SDRAM), double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory (double data rate SDRAM, DDR SDRAM), enhanced synchronous dynamic random access memory (enhanced SDRAM, ESDRAM), synchronous connection dynamic random access memory Access memory (synchlink DRAM, SLDRAM) and direct memory bus random access memory (direct rambus RAM, DR RAM).
上述各个附图对应的流程的描述各有侧重,某个流程中没有详述的部分,可以参见其他流程的相关描述。The descriptions of the processes corresponding to the above-mentioned figures have their own emphasis. For the parts not described in detail in a certain process, you can refer to the relevant descriptions of other processes.
本申请实施例还提供一种计算机可读存储介质,其特征在于,所述计算机可读存储介质具有程序指令,当所述程序指令被直接或者间接执行时,使得前文中的方法得以实现。The embodiment of the present application also provides a computer-readable storage medium, which is characterized in that the computer-readable storage medium has program instructions, and when the program instructions are directly or indirectly executed, the foregoing method is realized.
本申请实施例还提供了一种包含指令的计算机程序产品,当其在计算设备上运行时, 使得计算设备执行前文中的方法,或者使得所述计算设备实现前文中的装置的功能。The embodiment of the present application also provides a computer program product containing instructions, which, when run on a computing device, enables the computing device to execute the aforementioned method, or enables the computing device to realize the functions of the aforementioned apparatus.
本申请实施例还提供一种芯片系统,其特征在于,所述芯片系统包括至少一个处理器,当程序指令在所述至少一个处理器中执行时,使得前文中的方法得以实现。An embodiment of the present application further provides a chip system, which is characterized in that the chip system includes at least one processor, and when the program instructions are executed in the at least one processor, the foregoing method is implemented.
本申请实施例还提供一种车载系统,用于为车辆提供机械矩阵的控制功能。其包含至少一个本申请上述实施例提到的机械矩阵的控制装置,以及,机械矩阵。该系统内的至少一个传感器装置可以集成为一个整机或设备,或者该系统内的至少一个传感器装置也可以独立设置为元件或装置。The embodiment of the present application also provides an on-vehicle system, which is used to provide the control function of the mechanical matrix for the vehicle. It includes at least one control device of the mechanical matrix mentioned in the above-mentioned embodiments of the present application, and the mechanical matrix. The at least one sensor device in the system can be integrated into a complete machine or equipment, or the at least one sensor device in the system can also be independently configured as a component or device.
本申请实施例还提供一种车辆,所述车辆包括本申请至少一个上述实施例提到的机械矩阵的控制装置。An embodiment of the present application further provides a vehicle, the vehicle includes the mechanical matrix control device mentioned in at least one of the above-mentioned embodiments of the present application.
本申请实施例还提供一种终端,包括本申请至少一个上述实施例提到的机械矩阵的控制装置。An embodiment of the present application further provides a terminal, including the mechanical matrix control device mentioned in at least one of the foregoing embodiments of the present application.
进一步,该终端可以为运输设备,例如,轿车、卡车、摩托车、公共汽车、船、飞机、直升飞机、割草机、娱乐车、游乐场车辆、施工设备、电车、高尔夫球车、火车、手推车等。Further, the terminal can be transportation equipment, such as cars, trucks, motorcycles, buses, boats, airplanes, helicopters, lawn mowers, recreational vehicles, playground vehicles, construction equipment, trams, golf carts, trains , trolleys, etc.
上述实施例,可以全部或部分地通过软件、硬件、固件或其他任意组合来实现。当使用软件实现时,上述实施例可以全部或部分地以计算机程序产品的形式实现。所述计算机程序产品包括一个或多个计算机指令或计算机程序。在计算机上加载或执行所述计算机指令或计算机程序时,全部或部分地产生按照本申请实施例所述的流程或功能。所述计算机可以为通用计算机、专用计算机、计算机网络、或者其他可编程装置。所述计算机指令可以存储在计算机可读存储介质中,或者从一个计算机可读存储介质向另一个计算机可读存储介质传输,例如,所述计算机指令可以从一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心通过有线(例如红外、无线、微波等)方式向另一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心进行传输。所述计算机可读存储介质可以是计算机能够存取的任何可用介质或者是包含一个或多个可用介质集合的服务器、数据中心等数据存储设备。所述可用介质可以是磁性介质(例如,软盘、硬盘、磁带)、光介质(例如,DVD)、或者半导体介质。半导体介质可以是固态硬盘。The above-mentioned embodiments may be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, firmware or other arbitrary combinations. When implemented using software, the above-described embodiments may be implemented in whole or in part in the form of computer program products. The computer program product comprises one or more computer instructions or computer programs. When the computer instruction or computer program is loaded or executed on the computer, the processes or functions according to the embodiments of the present application will be generated in whole or in part. The computer may be a general purpose computer, a special purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable devices. The computer instructions may be stored in or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium, for example, the computer instructions may be transmitted from a website, computer, server or data center Transmission to another website site, computer, server or data center by wired (such as infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.). The computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer, or a data storage device such as a server or a data center that includes one or more sets of available media. The available media may be magnetic media (eg, floppy disk, hard disk, magnetic tape), optical media (eg, DVD), or semiconductor media. The semiconductor medium may be a solid state drive.
应理解,本文中术语“和/或”,仅仅是一种描述关联对象的关联关系,表示可以存在三种关系,例如,A和/或B,可以表示:单独存在A,同时存在A和B,单独存在B这三种情况,其中A、B可以是单数或者复数。另外,本文中字符“/”,一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系,但也可能表示的是一种“和/或”的关系,具体可参考前后文进行理解。It should be understood that the term "and/or" in this article is only an association relationship describing associated objects, which means that there may be three relationships, for example, A and/or B may mean: A exists alone, and A and B exist at the same time , there are three cases of B alone, where A and B can be singular or plural. In addition, the character "/" in this article generally indicates that the related objects are an "or" relationship, but it may also indicate an "and/or" relationship, which can be understood by referring to the context.
本申请中,“至少一个”是指一个或者多个,“多个”是指两个或两个以上。“以下至少一项(个)”或其类似表达,是指的这些项中的任意组合,包括单项(个)或复数项(个)的任意组合。例如,a、b或c中的至少一项(个),可以表示:a,b,c,a-b,a-c,b-c或a-b-c,其中a、b、c可以是单个,也可以是多个。In this application, "at least one" means one or more, and "multiple" means two or more. "At least one of the following" or similar expressions refer to any combination of these items, including any combination of single or plural items. For example, at least one item (unit) in a, b or c can represent: a, b, c, a-b, a-c, b-c or a-b-c, wherein a, b, c can be single or multiple.
应理解,在本申请的各种实施例中,上述各过程的序号的大小并不意味着执行顺序的先后,各过程的执行顺序应以其功能和内在逻辑确定,而不应对本申请实施例的实施过程构成任何限定。It should be understood that, in various embodiments of the present application, the sequence numbers of the above-mentioned processes do not mean the order of execution, and the execution order of the processes should be determined by their functions and internal logic, and should not be used in the embodiments of the present application. The implementation process constitutes any limitation.
在本说明书中使用的术语“部件”、“模块”、“系统”等用于表示计算机相关的实 体、硬件、固件、硬件和软件的组合、软件、或执行中的软件。例如,部件可以是但不限于,在处理器上运行的进程、处理器、对象、可执行文件、执行线程、程序和/或计算机。通过图示,在计算设备上运行的应用和计算设备都可以是部件。一个或多个部件可驻留在进程和/或执行线程中,部件可位于一个计算机上和/或分布在2个或更多个计算机之间。此外,这些部件可从在上面存储有各种数据结构的各种计算机可读介质执行。部件可例如根据具有一个或多个数据分组(例如来自与本地系统、分布式系统和/或网络间的另一部件交互的二个部件的数据,例如通过信号与其它系统交互的互联网)的信号通过本地和/或远程进程来通信。The terms "component", "module", "system" and the like are used in this specification to refer to a computer-related entity, hardware, firmware, a combination of hardware and software, software, or software in execution. For example, a component may be, but is not limited to being, a process running on a processor, a processor, an object, an executable, a thread of execution, a program, and/or a computer. By way of illustration, both an application running on a computing device and the computing device can be components. One or more components can reside within a process and/or thread of execution and a component can be localized on one computer and/or distributed between two or more computers. In addition, these components can execute from various computer readable media having various data structures stored thereon. A component may, for example, be based on a signal having one or more packets of data (e.g., data from two components interacting with another component between a local system, a distributed system, and/or a network, such as the Internet via a signal interacting with other systems). Communicate through local and/or remote processes.
本领域普通技术人员可以意识到,结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各示例的单元及算法步骤,能够以电子硬件、或者计算机软件和电子硬件的结合来实现。这些功能究竟以硬件还是软件方式来执行,取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能,但是这种实现不应认为超出本申请的范围。Those skilled in the art can appreciate that the units and algorithm steps of the examples described in conjunction with the embodiments disclosed herein can be implemented by electronic hardware, or a combination of computer software and electronic hardware. Whether these functions are executed by hardware or software depends on the specific application and design constraints of the technical solution. Those skilled in the art may use different methods to implement the described functions for each specific application, but such implementation should not be regarded as exceeding the scope of the present application.
所属领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到,为描述的方便和简洁,上述描述的系统、装置和单元的具体工作过程,可以参考前述方法实施例中的对应过程,在此不再赘述。Those skilled in the art can clearly understand that for the convenience and brevity of the description, the specific working process of the above-described system, device and unit can refer to the corresponding process in the foregoing method embodiment, which will not be repeated here.
在本申请所提供的几个实施例中,应该理解到,所揭露的系统、装置和方法,可以通过其它的方式实现。例如,以上所描述的装置实施例仅仅是示意性的,例如,所述单元的划分,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式,例如多个单元或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个系统,或一些特征可以忽略,或不执行。另一点,所显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些接口,装置或单元的间接耦合或通信连接,可以是电性,机械或其它的形式。In the several embodiments provided in this application, it should be understood that the disclosed systems, devices and methods may be implemented in other ways. For example, the device embodiments described above are only illustrative. For example, the division of the units is only a logical function division. In actual implementation, there may be other division methods. For example, multiple units or components can be combined or May be integrated into another system, or some features may be ignored, or not implemented. In another point, the mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection shown or discussed may be through some interfaces, and the indirect coupling or communication connection of devices or units may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms.
所述作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的,作为单元显示的部件可以是或者也可以不是物理单元,即可以位于一个地方,或者也可以分布到多个网络单元上。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部单元来实现本实施例方案的目的。The units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components displayed as units may or may not be physical units, that is, they may be located in one place, or may be distributed to multiple network units. Part or all of the units can be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of the solution of this embodiment.
另外,在本申请各个实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个处理单元中,也可以是各个单元单独物理存在,也可以两个或两个以上单元集成在一个单元中。In addition, each functional unit in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, each unit may exist separately physically, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
所述功能如果以软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用时,可以存储在一个计算机可读取存储介质中。基于这样的理解,本申请的技术方案本质上或者说对现有技术做出贡献的部分或者该技术方案的部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来,该计算机软件产品存储在一个存储介质中,包括若干指令用以使得一台计算机设备(可以是个人计算机,服务器,或者网络设备等)执行本申请各个实施例所述方法的全部或部分步骤。而前述的存储介质包括:U盘、移动硬盘、只读存储器(Read-Only Memory,ROM)、随机存取存储器(Random Access Memory,RAM)、磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。If the functions described above are realized in the form of software function units and sold or used as independent products, they can be stored in a computer-readable storage medium. Based on this understanding, the technical solution of the present application is essentially or the part that contributes to the prior art or the part of the technical solution can be embodied in the form of a software product, and the computer software product is stored in a storage medium, including Several instructions are used to make a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) execute all or part of the steps of the methods described in the various embodiments of the present application. The aforementioned storage media include: U disk, mobile hard disk, read-only memory (Read-Only Memory, ROM), random access memory (Random Access Memory, RAM), magnetic disk or optical disc and other media that can store program codes. .
以上所述,仅为本申请的具体实施方式,但本申请的保护范围并不局限于此,任何熟悉本技术领域的技术人员在本申请揭露的技术范围内,可轻易想到变化或替换,都应涵盖在本申请的保护范围之内。因此,本申请的保护范围应以所述权利要求的保护范围为准。The above is only a specific implementation of the application, but the scope of protection of the application is not limited thereto. Anyone familiar with the technical field can easily think of changes or substitutions within the technical scope disclosed in the application. Should be covered within the protection scope of this application. Therefore, the protection scope of the present application should be determined by the protection scope of the claims.

Claims (38)

  1. 一种机械矩阵,其特征在于,所述机械矩阵包括多个运动单元(110);A mechanical matrix, characterized in that the mechanical matrix includes a plurality of motion units (110);
    每个运动单元(110)的顶端的高度可调;The height of the top of each motion unit (110) is adjustable;
    每个运动单元(110)上设置有传感器(120),所述传感器(120)用于输出接触信息,所述接触信息用于指示运动单元(110)的顶端是否与目标接触。Each motion unit (110) is provided with a sensor (120), and the sensor (120) is used to output contact information, and the contact information is used to indicate whether the tip of the motion unit (110) is in contact with the target.
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的机械矩阵,其特征在于,所述多个运动单元(110)包括第一运动单元和第二运动单元,在根据所述接触信息调整后的所述机械阵列中,所述第一运动单元和所述第二运动单元形成凹陷结构,所述第一运动单元的顶端的高度小于所述第二运动单元的顶端的高度,所述第二运动单元环绕所述第一运动单元,所述第一运动单元包括所述多个运动单元(110)中与所述目标接触的接触运动单元。The mechanical matrix according to claim 1, wherein the plurality of motion units (110) include a first motion unit and a second motion unit, and in the mechanical array adjusted according to the contact information, the The first motion unit and the second motion unit form a concave structure, the height of the top of the first motion unit is smaller than the height of the top of the second motion unit, and the second motion unit surrounds the first motion unit The first motion unit includes a contact motion unit in contact with the target among the plurality of motion units (110).
  3. 根据权利要求2所述的机械矩阵,其特征在于,所述第一运动单元为所述接触运动单元,所述第二运动单元包括所述多个运动单元(110)中与所述接触运动单元距离小于预设值的邻近运动单元。The mechanical matrix according to claim 2, wherein the first motion unit is the contact motion unit, and the second motion unit includes the contact motion unit among the plurality of motion units (110). Neighboring motion units whose distance is less than a preset value.
  4. 根据权利要求1-3中任一项所述的机械矩阵,其特征在于,所述机械矩阵位于车辆中,所述车辆处于颠簸状态,The mechanical matrix according to any one of claims 1-3, wherein the mechanical matrix is located in a vehicle, and the vehicle is in a bumpy state,
    接触运动单元的高度的变化方向与所述车辆震动的震动方向相反,所述接触运动单元的高度变化量与所述车辆震动的震动距离正相关,所述接触运动单元是所述多个运动单元(110)中与所述目标接触的运动单元。The change direction of the height of the contact motion unit is opposite to the vibration direction of the vehicle vibration, the height change of the contact motion unit is positively related to the vibration distance of the vehicle vibration, and the contact motion unit is the plurality of motion units The motion unit in (110) in contact with the target.
  5. 根据权利要求1-4中任一项所述的机械矩阵,其特征在于,所述目标为电子显示设备,在根据所述接触信息调整后的所述机械阵列中,所述多个运动单元(110)中与所述目标接触的接触运动单元形成支架,所述支架用于设置所述目标的朝向。The mechanical matrix according to any one of claims 1-4, wherein the target is an electronic display device, and in the mechanical array adjusted according to the contact information, the plurality of motion units ( In 110), the contact motion unit in contact with the target forms a bracket, and the bracket is used to set the orientation of the target.
  6. 根据权利要求5所述的机械矩阵,其特征在于,所述支架使得所述目标朝向所述目标的使用者的头部。5. The mechanical matrix of claim 5, wherein said support orients said target toward the head of a user of said target.
  7. 根据权利要求6所述的机械矩阵,其特征在于,至少一个所述运动单元的顶端形成的坡面,使得所述目标滑动至目标位置,所述目标位置位于所述使用者的头部的对称平面,所述支架位于所述目标位置。The mechanical matrix according to claim 6, characterized in that at least one of the movement units has a slope formed on the top end so that the target slides to a target position, and the target position is symmetrical to the user's head plane, the bracket is located at the target position.
  8. 根据权利要求7所述的机械矩阵,其特征在于,所述目标在所述坡面的滑动使得所述目标的底边与所述使用者的直视方向垂直,所述支架的形成使得所述底边与所述对称平面垂直,并使得所述目标朝向所述使用者的头部。The mechanical matrix according to claim 7, characterized in that, the sliding of the target on the slope makes the bottom edge of the target perpendicular to the direct viewing direction of the user, and the formation of the support makes the The bottom edge is perpendicular to the plane of symmetry and directs the target towards the user's head.
  9. 根据权利要求1-8中任一项所述的机械矩阵,其特征在于,所述机械阵列用于显示图像,所述多个运动单元(110)对应于所述图像的多个像素,在根据所述接触信息调整后的所述机械阵列中,至少一个所述像素的颜色改变,所述至少一个像素是接触运动单元、邻近运动单元中的至少一个运动单元对应的像素,所述接触运动单元是所述多个运动单元(110)中与所述目标接触的运动单元,所述邻近运动单元是与所述接触运动单元距离小于预设值的运动单元。The mechanical matrix according to any one of claims 1-8, characterized in that, the mechanical array is used to display an image, and the plurality of motion units (110) correspond to a plurality of pixels of the image, according to In the mechanical array after the adjustment of the contact information, the color of at least one pixel is changed, and the at least one pixel is a pixel corresponding to at least one of the contact movement unit and the adjacent movement unit, and the contact movement unit is a movement unit in contact with the target among the plurality of movement units (110), and the adjacent movement unit is a movement unit whose distance from the contact movement unit is smaller than a preset value.
  10. 一种机械矩阵的控制方法,其特征在于,所述机械矩阵包括多个运动单元,每个运动单元上设置有传感器,所述方法包括:A method for controlling a mechanical matrix, characterized in that the mechanical matrix includes a plurality of motion units, each motion unit is provided with a sensor, and the method includes:
    获取所述多个运动单元上设置的传感器输出的接触信息,所述接触信息用于指示运动单元的顶端是否与目标接触;Acquiring contact information output by sensors provided on the plurality of motion units, the contact information being used to indicate whether the top of the motion unit is in contact with the target;
    根据所述接触信息,调整至少一个所述运动单元的顶端的高度,所述至少一个运动单元包括接触运动单元和/或邻近运动单元,所述接触运动单元的顶端与所述目标接触,所述邻近运动单元与所述接触运动单元距离小于预设值。According to the contact information, adjust the height of the top of at least one of the motion units, the at least one motion unit includes a contact motion unit and/or an adjacent motion unit, the top of the contact motion unit is in contact with the target, the The distance between the adjacent motion unit and the contact motion unit is smaller than a preset value.
  11. 根据权利要求10所述的方法,其特征在于,所述顶端的高度为绝对高度,所述多个运动单元包括第一运动单元和第二运动单元,The method according to claim 10, wherein the height of the top is an absolute height, and the plurality of motion units include a first motion unit and a second motion unit,
    对所述至少一个所述运动单元的顶端的高度的调整,使得所述第一运动单元和所述第二运动单元形成凹陷结构,所述第一运动单元的顶端的高度小于所述第二运动单元的顶端的高度,所述第二运动单元环绕在所述第一运动单元周围,在调整后的所述机械阵列中,所述第一运动单元包括所述接触运动单元。The height of the top of the at least one motion unit is adjusted so that the first motion unit and the second motion unit form a concave structure, and the height of the top of the first motion unit is smaller than that of the second motion unit The height of the top of the unit, the second movement unit surrounds the first movement unit, and in the adjusted mechanical array, the first movement unit includes the contact movement unit.
  12. 根据权利要求11所述的方法,其特征在于,在调整后的所述机械矩阵中,所述第一运动单元为所述接触运动单元,所述第二运动单元包括所述邻近运动单元。The method according to claim 11, wherein in the adjusted mechanical matrix, the first motion unit is the contact motion unit, and the second motion unit includes the adjacent motion unit.
  13. 根据权利要求10-12中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述机械矩阵位于车辆中,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 10-12, wherein the mechanical matrix is located in a vehicle, the method further comprising:
    获取颠簸信息,所述颠簸信息用于指示所述车辆震动的震动方向和震动距离,所述震动方向为与海平面垂直的方向的方向,所述震动距离用于指示所述车辆沿所述震动方向的绝对高度变化量;Acquiring bump information, the bump information is used to indicate the vibration direction and the vibration distance of the vehicle vibration, the vibration direction is a direction perpendicular to the sea level, and the vibration distance is used to indicate the vibration direction of the vehicle along the vibration The absolute height change in direction;
    根据所述颠簸信息,确定调整高度差,所述调整高度差与所述震动距离正相关;determining an adjusted height difference according to the turbulence information, and the adjusted height difference is positively correlated with the vibration distance;
    所述根据所述接触信息,调整至少一个所述运动单元的顶端的高度,包括:沿与所述震动方向相反的方向,调整所述接触运动单元的顶端的高度,所述接触运动单元的高度变化量为所述调整高度差。The adjusting the height of the top of at least one of the motion units according to the contact information includes: adjusting the height of the top of the contact motion unit in a direction opposite to the vibration direction, the height of the contact motion unit The amount of change is the adjusted height difference.
  14. 根据权利要求10-13中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述机械矩阵位于车辆中,A method according to any one of claims 10-13, characterized in that the mechanical matrix is located in a vehicle,
    所述方法还包括:确定所述车辆处于颠簸状态;The method also includes: determining that the vehicle is in a bumpy state;
    所述根据所述接触信息,调整至少一个所述运动单元的顶端的高度,包括:根据第一传感器输出的第一接触信息,调整所述接触运动单元的顶端的高度,以使得第一压力与第二压力之间的差异最小,所述第一接触信息用于指示所述第一压力,所述第一压力为所述车辆处于所述颠簸状态下所述接触运动单元受到的压力,所述第二压力为所述车辆处于平稳行驶状态下所述接触运动单元受到的压力。The adjusting the height of the top of at least one of the motion units according to the contact information includes: adjusting the height of the top of the contact motion unit according to the first contact information output by the first sensor, so that the first pressure and The difference between the second pressures is the smallest, the first contact information is used to indicate the first pressure, the first pressure is the pressure on the contact motion unit when the vehicle is in the bumpy state, the The second pressure is the pressure on the contact motion unit when the vehicle is in a stable running state.
  15. 根据权利要求10-14中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述目标为电子显示设备,The method according to any one of claims 10-14, wherein the target is an electronic display device,
    调整后的所述机械矩阵中,所述接触运动单元形成支架,所述支架用于设置所述目标的朝向。In the adjusted mechanical matrix, the contact motion unit forms a bracket, and the bracket is used to set the orientation of the target.
  16. 根据权利要求15所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:根据所述接触信息,确定所述目标为电子显示设备。The method according to claim 15, further comprising: determining that the target is an electronic display device according to the contact information.
  17. 根据权利要求15或16所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 15 or 16, wherein the method further comprises:
    获取头部位置信息,所述头部位置信息用于指示所述使用者的头部的位置,所述支架使得所述目标朝向所述使用者的头部。Head position information is acquired, the head position information is used to indicate the position of the user's head, and the bracket makes the target face the user's head.
  18. 根据权利要求17所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 17, further comprising:
    获取头部姿态信息,所述头部姿态信息用于指示所述使用者的头部的对称平面;acquiring head posture information, where the head posture information is used to indicate a symmetry plane of the user's head;
    根据所述头部姿态信息,确定目标位置,所述目标位置位于所述对称平面;determining a target position according to the head posture information, where the target position is located on the symmetry plane;
    所述调整至少一个所述运动单元的顶端的高度,包括:The adjusting the height of the top of at least one of the motion units includes:
    调整至少一个所述运动单元的顶端的高度以形成坡面,使得所述目标滑动至所述目标位置,所述支架位于所述目标位置。The height of the top end of at least one of the moving units is adjusted to form a slope, so that the target slides to the target position, and the support is located at the target position.
  19. 根据权利要求18所述的方法,其特征在于,所述头部姿态信息还用于指示所述使用者的直视方向,The method according to claim 18, wherein the head posture information is also used to indicate the user's direct gaze direction,
    所述目标在所述坡面的滑动使得所述目标的底边与所述对称平面垂直;The sliding of the target on the slope makes the base of the target perpendicular to the plane of symmetry;
    所述支架的形成使得所述底边与所述对称平面垂直,并使得所述目标朝向所述使用者的头部。The support is formed such that the base is perpendicular to the plane of symmetry and the target is directed toward the user's head.
  20. 根据权利要求10-19中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述机械阵列用于显示图像,所述多个运动单元对应于所述图像的多个像素,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 10-19, wherein the mechanical array is used to display an image, and the plurality of motion units correspond to a plurality of pixels of the image, the method further comprising:
    根据所述接触信息,调整至少一个所述像素的颜色,所述至少一个像素是所述接触运动单元、所述邻近运动单元中的至少一个运动单元对应的像素。Adjusting the color of at least one pixel according to the contact information, where the at least one pixel is a pixel corresponding to at least one of the contact motion unit and the adjacent motion unit.
  21. 一种机械矩阵的控制方法,其特征在于,所述机械矩阵包括多个运动单元,每个所述运动单元上设置有传感器,所述传感器用于输出接触信息,所述接触信息用于指示运动单元的顶端是否与目标接触,所述方法包括:A method for controlling a mechanical matrix, characterized in that the mechanical matrix includes a plurality of motion units, and each of the motion units is provided with a sensor, and the sensor is used to output contact information, and the contact information is used to indicate motion whether the top of the unit is in contact with the target, the method comprising:
    获取按钮形成信息;Get button formation information;
    根据所述按钮形成信息,调整所述多个运动单元中的第一运动单元、第二运动单元中的至少一个所述运动单元的顶端的高度,以形成按钮,所述第二运动单元环绕所述第一运动单元,调整后的所述机械矩阵中,位于所述按钮所在区域的所述第一运动单元的顶端的高度与所述第二运动单元的顶端的高度不同;According to the button formation information, adjust the height of the top of at least one of the first motion unit and the second motion unit among the plurality of motion units to form a button, and the second motion unit surrounds all the motion units. For the first motion unit, in the adjusted mechanical matrix, the height of the top of the first motion unit located in the area where the button is located is different from the height of the top of the second motion unit;
    输出按键信息,所述按键信息是根据所述第一运动单元上设置的传感器输出的接触信息确定的。Output key information, the key information is determined according to the contact information output by the sensor provided on the first motion unit.
  22. 根据权利要求21所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 21, further comprising:
    获取按钮消除信息;Obtain button elimination information;
    根据所述按钮消除信息,调整所述第一运动单元、所述第二运动单元中的至少一个所述运动单元的顶端的高度,以消除所述按钮。According to the button elimination information, the height of the top of at least one of the first motion unit and the second motion unit is adjusted to eliminate the button.
  23. 一种机械矩阵的控制装置,其特征在于,所述机械矩阵包括多个运动单元,每个运动单元上设置有传感器,所述控制装置包括:A control device for a mechanical matrix, characterized in that the mechanical matrix includes a plurality of motion units, each motion unit is provided with a sensor, and the control device includes:
    获取模块,用于获取所述多个运动单元上设置的传感器输出的接触信息,所述接触信息用于指示运动单元的顶端是否与目标接触;An acquisition module, configured to acquire contact information output by sensors provided on the plurality of motion units, the contact information being used to indicate whether the top of the motion unit is in contact with the target;
    调整模块,用于根据所述接触信息,调整至少一个所述运动单元的顶端的高度,所述至少一个运动单元包括接触运动单元和/或邻近运动单元,所述接触运动单元的顶端与所述目标接触,所述邻近运动单元与所述接触运动单元距离小于预设值。An adjustment module, configured to adjust the height of the top of at least one of the motion units according to the contact information, the at least one motion unit includes a contact motion unit and/or an adjacent motion unit, the top of the contact motion unit is in contact with the The target is in contact, and the distance between the adjacent motion unit and the contacting motion unit is smaller than a preset value.
  24. 根据权利要求23所述的装置,其特征在于,所述顶端的高度为绝对高度,所述多个运动单元包括第一运动单元和第二运动单元,The device according to claim 23, wherein the height of the top is an absolute height, and the plurality of motion units include a first motion unit and a second motion unit,
    对所述至少一个所述运动单元的顶端的高度的调整,使得所述第一运动单元和所述第 二运动单元形成凹陷结构,所述第一运动单元的顶端的高度小于所述第二运动单元的顶端的高度,所述第二运动单元环绕在所述第一运动单元周围,在调整后的所述机械阵列中,所述第一运动单元包括所述接触运动单元。The height of the top of the at least one motion unit is adjusted so that the first motion unit and the second motion unit form a concave structure, and the height of the top of the first motion unit is smaller than that of the second motion unit The height of the top of the unit, the second movement unit surrounds the first movement unit, and in the adjusted mechanical array, the first movement unit includes the contact movement unit.
  25. 根据权利要求24所述的装置,其特征在于,调整后的所述机械矩阵中,所述第一运动单元为所述接触运动单元,所述第二运动单元包括所述邻近运动单元。The device according to claim 24, wherein in the adjusted mechanical matrix, the first motion unit is the contact motion unit, and the second motion unit includes the adjacent motion unit.
  26. 根据权利要求23-25中任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述机械矩阵位于车辆中,Apparatus according to any one of claims 23-25, characterized in that the mechanical matrix is located in a vehicle,
    所述获取模块还用于,获取颠簸信息,所述颠簸信息用于指示所述车辆震动的震动方向和震动距离,所述震动方向为与海平面垂直的方向的方向,所述震动距离用于指示所述车辆沿所述震动方向的绝对高度变化量;The acquisition module is also used to acquire bump information, the bump information is used to indicate the vibration direction and vibration distance of the vehicle vibration, the vibration direction is a direction perpendicular to the sea level, and the vibration distance is used for Indicating the absolute height change of the vehicle along the vibration direction;
    所述控制装置还包括处理模块,用于根据所述颠簸信息,确定调整高度差,所述调整高度差与所述震动距离正相关;The control device further includes a processing module, configured to determine an adjusted height difference according to the turbulence information, and the adjusted height difference is positively correlated with the vibration distance;
    所述调整模块还用于,沿与所述震动方向相反的方向,调整所述接触运动单元的顶端的高度,所述接触运动单元的高度变化量为所述调整高度差。The adjustment module is further configured to adjust the height of the top of the contact motion unit in a direction opposite to the vibration direction, and the height change of the contact motion unit is the adjusted height difference.
  27. 根据权利要求23-26中任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述机械矩阵位于车辆中,Apparatus according to any one of claims 23-26, characterized in that the mechanical matrix is located in a vehicle,
    所述控制装置还包括处理模块,所述处理模块用于确定所述车辆处于颠簸状态;The control device also includes a processing module, the processing module is used to determine that the vehicle is in a bumpy state;
    所述调整模块还用于,根据第一传感器输出的第一接触信息,调整所述接触运动单元的顶端的高度,以使得第一压力与第二压力之间的差异最小,所述第一接触信息用于指示所述第一压力,所述第一压力为在所述车辆处于所述颠簸状态下所述接触运动单元受到的压力,所述第二压力为所述车辆处于平稳行驶状态下所述接触运动单元受到的压力。The adjustment module is further configured to, according to the first contact information output by the first sensor, adjust the height of the top of the contact motion unit so that the difference between the first pressure and the second pressure is the smallest, and the first contact The information is used to indicate the first pressure, the first pressure is the pressure on the contact motion unit when the vehicle is in the bumpy state, and the second pressure is the pressure when the vehicle is in the smooth running state The pressure on the contact motion unit.
  28. 根据权利要求23-27中任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述目标为电子显示设备,The device according to any one of claims 23-27, wherein the target is an electronic display device,
    调整后的所述机械矩阵中,所述接触运动单元形成支架,所述支架用于设置所述目标的朝向。In the adjusted mechanical matrix, the contact motion unit forms a bracket, and the bracket is used to set the orientation of the target.
  29. 根据权利要求28所述的装置,其特征在于,所述控制装置还包括处理模块,所述处理模块用于,根据所述接触信息,确定所述目标为电子显示设备。The device according to claim 28, wherein the control device further comprises a processing module, the processing module is configured to determine that the target is an electronic display device according to the contact information.
  30. 根据权利要求28或29所述的装置,其特征在于,Apparatus according to claim 28 or 29, characterized in that,
    所述获取模块还用于,获取头部位置信息,所述头部位置信息用于指示所述使用者的头部的位置,所述支架使得所述目标朝向所述使用者的头部。The acquiring module is further configured to acquire head position information, the head position information is used to indicate the position of the user's head, and the bracket makes the target face the user's head.
  31. 根据权利要求30所述的装置,其特征在于,The device according to claim 30, characterized in that,
    所述获取模块还用于,获取头部姿态信息,所述头部姿态信息用于指示所述使用者的头部的对称平面;The acquiring module is further configured to acquire head posture information, where the head posture information is used to indicate the symmetry plane of the user's head;
    所述处理模块还用于,根据所述头部姿态信息,确定目标位置,所述目标位置位于所述对称平面;The processing module is further configured to determine a target position according to the head posture information, and the target position is located on the symmetry plane;
    所述调整模块还用于,调整至少一个所述运动单元的高度以形成坡面,使得所述目标滑动至所述目标位置,所述支架位于所述目标位置。The adjusting module is further used to adjust the height of at least one of the moving units to form a slope, so that the target slides to the target position, and the support is located at the target position.
  32. 根据权利要求31所述的装置,其特征在于,所述头部姿态信息还用于指示所述使用者的直视方向,The device according to claim 31, wherein the head posture information is also used to indicate the direct-looking direction of the user,
    所述目标在所述坡面的滑动转动使得所述目标的底边与所述直视方向垂直;The target slides and rotates on the slope so that the bottom edge of the target is perpendicular to the direct viewing direction;
    所述支架的形成使得所述底边与所述对称平面垂直,并使得所述目标朝向所述使用者的头部。The support is formed such that the base is perpendicular to the plane of symmetry and the target is directed toward the user's head.
  33. 根据权利要求23-32中任一项所述的装置,其特征在于,所述机械阵列用于显示图像,所述多个运动单元对应于所述图像中的多个像素,The device according to any one of claims 23-32, wherein the mechanical array is used to display an image, and the plurality of motion units correspond to a plurality of pixels in the image,
    所述调整模块还用于,根据所述接触信息,调整至少一个所述像素的颜色,所述至少一个像素是所述接触运动单元、所述邻近运动单元中的至少一个运动单元对应的像素。The adjustment module is further configured to adjust the color of at least one pixel according to the contact information, and the at least one pixel is a pixel corresponding to at least one motion unit among the contact motion unit and the adjacent motion units.
  34. 一种机械矩阵的控制装置,其特征在于,所述机械矩阵包括多个运动单元,每个所述运动单元上设置有传感器,所述传感器用于输出接触信息,所述接触信息用于指示运动单元的顶端是否与目标接触,所述控制装置包括:A control device for a mechanical matrix, characterized in that the mechanical matrix includes a plurality of motion units, and each of the motion units is provided with a sensor, and the sensor is used to output contact information, and the contact information is used to indicate movement Whether the tip of the unit is in contact with the target, the control means include:
    获取模块,用于获取按钮形成信息;The acquisition module is used to acquire button formation information;
    调整模块,用于根据所述按钮形成信息,调整所述多个运动单元中的第一运动单元、第二运动单元中的至少一个所述运动单元的高度,以形成按钮,所述第二运动单元环绕所述第一运动单元,调整后的所述机械矩阵中,位于所述按钮所在区域的所述第一运动单元的顶端的高度与所述第二运动单元的顶端的高度不同;An adjustment module, configured to adjust the height of at least one of the first motion unit and the second motion unit among the plurality of motion units according to the button formation information, so as to form a button, and the second motion unit The unit surrounds the first motion unit, and in the adjusted mechanical matrix, the height of the top of the first motion unit located in the area where the button is located is different from the height of the top of the second motion unit;
    输出模块,用于输出按键信息,所述按键信息是根据所述第一运动单元上设置的传感器输出的接触信息确定的。An output module, configured to output key information, the key information is determined according to the contact information output by the sensor provided on the first motion unit.
  35. 根据权利要求34所述的装置,其特征在于,The device according to claim 34, characterized in that,
    所述获取模块还用于,获取按钮消除信息;The acquiring module is also used to acquire button elimination information;
    所述调整模块还用于,根据所述按钮消除信息,调整所述第一运动单元、所述第二运动单元中的至少一个所述运动单元的高度,以消除所述按钮。The adjustment module is further configured to adjust the height of at least one of the first motion unit and the second motion unit according to the button elimination information, so as to eliminate the button.
  36. 一种机械矩阵的控制装置,其特征在于,包括至少一个存储器和至少一个处理器,所述至少一个存储器用于存储程序,所述至少一个处理器用于运行所述程序,以实现权利要求10-22中任一项所述的方法。A control device for a mechanical matrix, characterized in that it includes at least one memory and at least one processor, the at least one memory is used to store a program, and the at least one processor is used to run the program, so as to realize claim 10- The method described in any one of 22.
  37. 一种芯片,其特征在于,包括至少一个处理器和接口电路,所述接口电路用于为所述至少一个处理器提供程序指令或者数据,所述至少一个处理器用于执行所述程序指令,以实现权利要求10-22中任一项所述的方法。A chip, characterized in that it includes at least one processor and an interface circuit, the interface circuit is used to provide program instructions or data to the at least one processor, and the at least one processor is used to execute the program instructions to Implementing the method described in any one of claims 10-22.
  38. 一种计算机可读存储介质,其特征在于,所述计算机可读介质存储用于设备执行的程序代码,该程序代码被所述设备执行时,实现如权利要求10-22中任一项所述的方法。A computer-readable storage medium, characterized in that the computer-readable medium stores program code for execution by a device, and when the program code is executed by the device, the implementation of any one of claims 10-22 Methods.
PCT/CN2021/101254 2021-06-21 2021-06-21 Mechanical matrix, and control method and apparatus for mechanical matrix WO2022266803A1 (en)

Priority Applications (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202180005753.XA CN116171569A (en) 2021-06-21 2021-06-21 Mechanical matrix, control method and device of mechanical matrix
PCT/CN2021/101254 WO2022266803A1 (en) 2021-06-21 2021-06-21 Mechanical matrix, and control method and apparatus for mechanical matrix

Applications Claiming Priority (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/CN2021/101254 WO2022266803A1 (en) 2021-06-21 2021-06-21 Mechanical matrix, and control method and apparatus for mechanical matrix

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2022266803A1 true WO2022266803A1 (en) 2022-12-29

Family

ID=84543844

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2021/101254 WO2022266803A1 (en) 2021-06-21 2021-06-21 Mechanical matrix, and control method and apparatus for mechanical matrix

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN116171569A (en)
WO (1) WO2022266803A1 (en)

Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20070083289A1 (en) * 2005-08-19 2007-04-12 David Russell Array mesh apparatus, system & methods
CN205376012U (en) * 2016-03-01 2016-07-06 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 Flexible display
CN106809130A (en) * 2015-11-27 2017-06-09 比亚迪股份有限公司 Jacking system for vehicle mounted multimedia element and the vehicle with it
CN109474720A (en) * 2018-11-06 2019-03-15 深圳天珑无线科技有限公司 A kind of control method of mobile terminal and mobile terminal
CN209297280U (en) * 2018-08-29 2019-08-23 苏州创捷传媒展览股份有限公司 Ball float matrix display systems

Patent Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20070083289A1 (en) * 2005-08-19 2007-04-12 David Russell Array mesh apparatus, system & methods
CN106809130A (en) * 2015-11-27 2017-06-09 比亚迪股份有限公司 Jacking system for vehicle mounted multimedia element and the vehicle with it
CN205376012U (en) * 2016-03-01 2016-07-06 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 Flexible display
CN209297280U (en) * 2018-08-29 2019-08-23 苏州创捷传媒展览股份有限公司 Ball float matrix display systems
CN109474720A (en) * 2018-11-06 2019-03-15 深圳天珑无线科技有限公司 A kind of control method of mobile terminal and mobile terminal

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN116171569A (en) 2023-05-26

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US11366516B2 (en) Visibility improvement method based on eye tracking, machine-readable storage medium and electronic device
US11960641B2 (en) Application placement based on head position
US10671156B2 (en) Electronic apparatus operated by head movement and operation method thereof
US20200241731A1 (en) Virtual reality vr interface generation method and apparatus
US20120139907A1 (en) 3 dimensional (3d) display system of responding to user motion and user interface for the 3d display system
CN106257486A (en) For the method regulating the parts of vehicle
JP2017045294A (en) Program for controlling head-mounted display system
CN102736846B (en) Detection area enlarging device, display device, and detection area enlarging method
CN113840757B (en) Display screen adjusting method and device
US9919429B2 (en) Robot, control method, and program
JP6121496B2 (en) Program to control the head mounted display system
WO2005010739A1 (en) System and method for controlling the display of an image
WO2022266803A1 (en) Mechanical matrix, and control method and apparatus for mechanical matrix
CN102902466A (en) Image playing device capable of automatically adjusting display image and method for adjusting display image
US20200342636A1 (en) Image processing apparatus and display image generating method
WO2018051964A1 (en) Video display system, video display method, and video display program
US20170131837A1 (en) Interface system, object for operation input, operation input supporting method
CN106297611B (en) Display control method and device
KR102524097B1 (en) Eye-based personalized head-mounted display device and control method thereof
CN103995586B (en) Non- wearing based on virtual touch screen refers to gesture man-machine interaction method
JP6965374B2 (en) Image processing device and display image generation method
JP6121495B2 (en) Program to control the head mounted display system
WO2024104023A9 (en) Information display method and related apparatus
JP6004984B2 (en) Map drawing device
KR20230166856A (en) Interactive video output system

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 21946305

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 21946305

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1